Fanuc Oi-Pf Connection Manual B-64623EN - 01

FANUC Series 0+-PF
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
B-64623EN/01
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japans Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan. Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license
of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the
product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to
a failure of the product, install a safety device.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as impossible.
B-64623EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units.
It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines
equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to
control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this
manual and relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING .......................................................s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING ................................................................s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS..........................................................................................s-7
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL ...................................................s-7
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ...............................................s-8
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE .........................................................................s-9
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64623EN/01
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the
machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function or by operating the machine with neither a tool
nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to
the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate.
The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate.
If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and
amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
machine itself, or injury to the user.
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is not need
to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before
making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself,
or injury to the user.
6 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the
MDI unit until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI unit are dedicated to maintenance or other special
operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave
unexpectedly.
7 The OPERATORS MANUAL and programming manual supplied with a CNC
unit provide an overall description of the machine's functions, including any
optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one machine
model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the manuals may not
actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.
8 Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine-tool
builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine-tool builder for details of their use and any related cautions.
s-2
CAUTION
The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication
technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in non-volatile memory in
the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off.
Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to
delete all data from non-volatile memory as part of error recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of
deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.
The number of times to write machining programs to the non-volatile memory is
limited.
You must use "High-speed program management" when registration and the
deletion of the machining programs are frequently repeated in such case that the
machining programs are automatically downloaded from a personal computer at
each machining.
In "High-speed program management", the program is not saved to the
non-volatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of programs.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform
programming, read the supplied OPERATORS MANUAL carefully such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
WARNING
1 Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave
unexpectedly as a result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move
command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
2 Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear
movement between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully
confirmed before performing programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If
the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine itself,
the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal-direction
(perpendicular) control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis.
Incorrect programming may result in the rotation axis speed becoming
excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its grip on
the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely. Such mishap is likely to
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
s-3
WARNING
4 Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement
units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current
position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement
units are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data
specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
to the user.
5 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as
required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is
performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even
if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
6 Same address command in same block
The G code or M code including the same address cannot be commanded on
the same block. If you use the same address, it may result in the machine
machine itself, or injury to the user. Command on separate block.
7 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice
versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
8 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, or helical interpolation,
the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the
respective functions for details.
9 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip
is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will
be executed without performing a skip.
10 Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable
mirror image is enabled.
11 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position
return command is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is
temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel
compensation function mode.
s-4
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to
operate your machine, read the supplied OPERATORS MANUAL carefully, such that you are fully
familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1 Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool
and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have
been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2 Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as
required.
If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference position
return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual
reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100,
applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may
damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
4 Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable), the
speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
5 Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is
operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing
injury to the user.
s-5
WARNING
6 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece
coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control
of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making
allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
7 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination with the
MDI unit, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine
operator's panel, such as mode change, override value change, and jog feed
commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI unit keys are operated inadvertently, the machine
may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
8 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently running program. As a result, the
servo axes are stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to function for
reasons such as an MDI unit problem. So, when the motors must be stopped,
use the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to ensure security.
9 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the
machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting
the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the
manual absolute switches, parameters, and absolute/incremental command
mode.
10 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled
using custom macro system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the
machine in this case.
11 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry
run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
12 Cutter radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode,
because cutter radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered
from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in cutter radius compensation
mode, pay particular attention to the tool path when automatic operation is
subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions
for details.
13 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited
(modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if
machining is resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do not
modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program while it is in use.
s-6
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

WARNING
1 When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close
the machine cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after
such a modification. Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using
functions such as the single block function, feedrate override function, and
machine lock function, or by operating the machine without mounting a tool and
workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that it operates normally, the
machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece,
and presenting a risk of injury.
2 The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so that those
parameters usually need not be modified. When a parameter must be modified
for some reason, ensure that you fully understand the function of that parameter
before attempting to modify it. If a parameter is set incorrectly, the machine may
move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece, and
presenting a risk of injury.
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL

WARNING
FANUCs touch panel is an analog resistive film type. When two or more points
are pressed at the same time, there is a possibility that it behaves as if the
center of these points was pressed, and this wrong output or malfunction may
cause an accident. Do not create a virtual machine operators panel screens on
which two or more points are pressed at the same time for touch panel
operation.
On the virtual machine operator panel screen, never support safety-related

operations that may lose human life or may cause serious damage, or real-time
operations such as emergency stop, program start, program stop, axis
movements, etc. If there is a failure in the CNC, peripheral units, or cable,
wrong outputs or malfunctions may cause an accident. In addition, real-time
operation is not guaranteed on the touch panel screen.
s-7
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT

WARNING
Be careful enough for the following warnings when you develop two or more
applications or use networks.
If you neglect them, there is a danger of the user being injured or there is a danger
of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged.
1 Be careful enough if you write an identical NC data, an identical PMC data or a

series of related data set by two or more above applications including network
functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles (in other
words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the data will be written in
an unexpected order.
Therefore, do NOT write above data in the following cases.

- Applications and network functions
- Two or more applications
- Two or more network functions
Data, applications and network functions of interest are listed in below. However,
all may not be listed completely because new features will be added in the
future.
2 Be careful enough that you must prevent PMC signals in the same byte from
being written by the following two or more applications including network
functions. While an application reads and writes one byte of PMC signals, other
applications may write the same byte.
3 Be careful enough if you process a PMC signal set that is related to a NC

function by using the following two or more applications including network
functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles (in other
words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the NC may receive the
PMC signal set in an unexpected order.
4 Generally, when multi-byte data are read or written at once among the following
two or more applications including network functions, the coherency of the read
multi-byte data (in other words, reading all latest data at once) is not guaranteed.
To ensure the coherency of the multi-byte data, prepare flags to notify the
completion of reading or writing process that is separated from the entity of the
data and make the handshaking process to access the data by using the flags.
s-8
WARNING
Data List Table
Category Data
Parameter, Tool compensation value and related data,
Work zero offset value and related data,
Workpiece coordinate system shift value and related data,
Macro variable, P-CODE variable, Program and related
data,
General data for NC
Tool management function data, Tool life management
data,
Error compensation related data ,
Overtravel check (Interference check) related data ,
Software operators panel related data
PMC data PMC signal, PMC parameter
Tool data for punch press and related data, Safety zone
Data for Punch press
data and related data
Parameters for Data Server, Parameters for network
Other data
setting
List Table of Applications and Network Functions

Category Functions
PMC Ladder, Macro Executor, C Language Executor, FANUC PICTURE,
Applications
FOCAS2
FL-net, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet,
Network functions
CC-Link
5 CNC has functions that read or write PMC signals in other than the G/F address.
Be careful enough if the above mentioned applications and network read or write
PMC signals used by these functions. When reading or writing the same PMC
signal, applications or CNC functions may work in an unexpected manner.
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
electric shock hazard.
s-9
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must
retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external
power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section Method of replacing battery in the OPERATORS
MANUAL (Common to T/M series) for details of the battery replacement
procedure.
WARNING
2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series Maintenance Manual for details
of the battery replacement procedure.
WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the
cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous
s-10
WARNING
When using the controller unit, display unit, MDI unit, or machine operator's
panel, prevent these units from directly exposing to chips or coolants. Even if
direct exposure to coolants is prevented, coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at
a high activation level, oil-free synthetic-type coolants, or water-soluble coolants
at a high alkali level particularly have large effects on the control unit and
peripheral units, possibly causing the following failures.
Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level
Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity
level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts
chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to
corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or peripheral units, it corrodes
metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly
leading to a defective component.
Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability
Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example,
PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a
coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow
into the CNC or peripheral units through, for example, gaskets. It is likely that,
if the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the
insulation and damage the components.
Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level
Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong
alkali that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant
spatters over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically
with a material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration.
s-11
B-64623EN/01 PREFACE
PREFACE
Organization of this manual
This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine tool builders to design their CNC
machine tools. The following items are explained for each function.
1. Overview
Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operators Manual as requied.
2. Signal
Describes names, functions, output conditions and addresses of the signals required to realize a
function.
3. Parameter
Describes parameters related with a function.
4. Alarms and message
Lists the alarms and messages related with a function in a table.
5. Reference item
List the related items of the related manuals in a table.
A list of addresses of all signals and a list of signals are described in the appendix of this manual. Refer to
it as required.
Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 0iPF 0iPF Series 0iPF
Description of signals
[Example of controlling one path using one PMC]
G0000~ X000~
CNC PMC Machine tool

F0000~ Y000~
- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
p-1
PREFACE B-64623EN/01
NOTE
1 The following notational conventions are used in the signal description of each
function.
Example) Axis moving signals MV1 to MV8 <Fn102>

Signal name Symbol name Signal address
2 One of the following superscripts is attached to the top right of a symbol
depending on the signal type.
- Path type (on CNC side) : #P
- Controlled axis type (on CNC side) : #SV
- PMC axis control group type : #PX
Refer to Appendix List of Addresses for details
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a
different meaning.
4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used
in each path on the CNC side, as shown below.
1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999)
p-2
Description of parameters
Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
Bit machine group
0 or 1
Bit path
Bit axis
Byte
Byte machine group -128 to 127 Some parameters handle these types of
Byte path 0 to 255 data as unsigned data.
Byte axis
Word
Word machine group -32768 to 32767 Some parameters handle these types of
Word path 0 to 65535 data as unsigned data.
Word axis
2-word
2-word machine group Some parameters handle these types of
0 to 999999999
2-word path data as unsigned data.
2-word axis
Real
Real machine group See the Standard Parameter
Real path Setting Tables.
Real axis
NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, and bit axis types
consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with eight different
meanings).
2 For machine group types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
machine groups are present, so that independent data can be set for each
machine group.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of paths are
present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of control
axes are present, so that independent data can be set for each control axis.
5 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range
varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a specific
parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
p-3
- Standard parameter setting tables

This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the
real type, real machine group type, real path type, real axis type, and real spindle type. The data type and
unit of data of each parameter conform to the specifications of each function.
(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)

Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 -999999.99 to +999999.99
mm
IS-B 0.001 -999999.999 to +999999.999
deg.
IS-C 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 -99999.999 to +99999.999
inch IS-B 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 -9999.99999 to +9999.99999
(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)

IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
mm
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
deg.
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

IS-A 0.01 0.0 to +999000.00
mm/min
IS-B 0.001 0.0 to +999000.000
degree/min
IS-C 0.0001 0.0 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.0 to +96000.000
inch/min IS-B 0.0001 0.0 to +9600.0000
IS-C 0.00001 0.0 to +4000.00000
p-4
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges for IS-C are extended as follows:
mm/min IS-C 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +9600.0000
(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
mm/sec2
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
deg./sec2
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch/sec2 IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges for IS-C are extended as follows:
mm/min IS-C
0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
CAUTION
1 Values are rounded up or down to the nearest multiples of the minimum data
unit.
2 A valid data range means data input limits, and may differ from values
representing actual performance.
3 For information on the ranges of commands to the CNC, refer to Appendix D,
"Range of Command Value" of the Operators Manual (B-64624EN).
p-5
- Parameters of the bit type, bit machine group type, bit path type, and bit axis
type
Data No. Data (Data #0 to #7 are bit positions.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
- Parameters other than the bit-type parameters above

Data No. Data
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis
NOTE
1 The bits left blank in description of parameters and parameter numbers that
appear on the display but are not found in the parameter list are reserved for
future expansion. They must always be 0.
2 When "to" is inserted between two parameter numbers, there are parameters
with successive numbers between the two starting and ending parameter
numbers, but those intermediate parameter numbers are omitted for
convenience.
3 The lower-case letter "x" following the name of a bit-type parameter indicates the
following:
- x : Bit axis type parameters
p-6
Related manuals of Series 0i-PF

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 0i-PF. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Manual name Specification number
FANUC Series 0iF DESCRIPTIONS B-64602EN
FANUC Series 0iF CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64603EN
FANUC Series 0iF CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64603EN-1
FANUC Series 0iPF CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64623EN *
FANUC Series 0iPF OPERATORS MANUAL B-64624EN
FANUC Series 0iF MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64605EN
FANUC Series 0iF PARAMETER MANUAL B-64610EN
FANUC Series 0iPF PARAMETER MANUAL B-64630EN
Programming
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-2
Macro Compiler PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-66263EN
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64513EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-63993EN
Industrial Ethernet CONNECTION MANUAL B-64013EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64043EN
CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64463EN
Dual Check Safety
Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL B-64483EN-2
p-7
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR i series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR i series
Table 2 Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series / FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series /
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series / FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO B-65270EN
MOTOR DiS series PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series DESCRIPTIONS B-65282EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series / FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series /
B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series MAINTENANCE MANUAL
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series of servo motor is used. For
servo motor information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor that are actually connected.
Notes on various kinds of data

CAUTION
Machining programs, parameters, offset data, etc. are stored in the CNC unit
internal non-volatile memory. In general, these contents are not lost by the
switching ON/OFF of the power. However, it is possible that a state can occur
where precious data stored in the non-volatile memory has to be deleted,
because of deletions from a maloperation, or by a failure restoration. In order to
restore rapidly when this kind of mishap occurs, it is recommended that you
create a copy of the various kinds of data beforehand.
The number of times to write machining programs to the non-volatile memory is
limited.
You must use "High-speed program management" when registration and the
deletion of the machining programs are frequently repeated in such case that the
machining programs are automatically downloaded from a personal computer at
each machining.
In "High-speed program management", the program is not saved to the
non-volatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of programs.
Please make the application software by using FOCAS2/ C Language Library to
save the changed programs to the non-volatile memory when "High-speed
program management" is used.
p-8
B-64623EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ............................ s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING...................................... s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS............................................................ s-7
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL ....................... s-7
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT..................... s-8
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................................... s-9
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS ............................................................................. 1
2 FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS THAT DIFFER FROM THE M SERIES . 7
2.1 AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................................ 7
2.1.1 Controlled Axis ........................................................................................................7
2.1.2 Specifying the Rotation Axis ...................................................................................7
2.1.3 Mirror Image ............................................................................................................8
2.1.4 Follow-up .................................................................................................................8
2.2 MANUAL OPERATION.................................................................................. 8
2.2.1 Jog Feed/Incremental Feed.......................................................................................8
2.3 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT................................................ 9
2.3.1 Automatic Reference Position Return and Return from
the Reference Position..............................................................................................9
2.3.2 2nd Reference Position Return Signals / 3rd, 4th Reference Position Return Signals
................................................................................................................................10
2.4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ......................................................................... 11
2.4.1 Cycle Start/Feed Hold ............................................................................................11
2.4.2 Machine Lock.........................................................................................................12
2.4.3 Single Block ...........................................................................................................12
2.5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION .................................................................... 12
2.5.1 Positioning..............................................................................................................12
2.5.2 Linear Interpolation................................................................................................13
2.5.3 Circular Interpolation .............................................................................................13
2.5.4 Normal Direction Control.......................................................................................13
2.6 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL
..................................................................................................................... 14
2.6.1 Rapid Traverse Rate ...............................................................................................14
2.6.2 Rapid Traverse Override ........................................................................................15
2.6.3 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations..................................................................15
2.6.4 AI Advanced Preview Control / AI Contour Control I ..........................................18
2.7 AUXILIARY FUNCTION .............................................................................. 18
2.7.1 Auxiliary Function/2nd Auxiliary Function...........................................................18
2.7.2 Auxiliary Function Lock ........................................................................................18
2.8 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION..................................................................... 19
2.9 TOOL FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................... 19
2.9.1 Tool Life Management ...........................................................................................19
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64623EN/01
2.10 PROGRAM COMMAND .............................................................................. 20

2.10.1 G Code System.......................................................................................................20
2.11 SKIP FUNCTION ......................................................................................... 22
2.11.1 Skip Function .........................................................................................................22
3 PRESSING FUNCTION......................................................................... 23
3.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1CYCLE PRESSING).............................................. 23
3.1.1 Block in which Punching is Made..........................................................................23
3.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF .............................................................. 25
3.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION ................................................................................ 25
3.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION....................................................................... 27
3.5 PRESS FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 28
3.5.1 1Cycle Press .........................................................................................................28
3.5.2 Continuous Press (Nibbling) ..................................................................................32
3.5.3 Manual Press ..........................................................................................................37
3.5.4 Press Start Lock Signal (Input) ..............................................................................38
3.5.5 Press Start Assistance Signal..................................................................................39
3.5.6 Press Start Waiting Signal (Input) and Press Start Waiting Signal B ....................40
3.5.7 Press Start Signal B (Output) .................................................................................41
3.5.8 Press Stop Signal Neglect.......................................................................................42
3.5.9 Twostep Selection (Input) SNP for Nibbling .......................................................43
3.5.10 Press Start Auxiliary Signal B................................................................................43
3.5.11 Forming Mode Selection Signal.............................................................................44
3.6 EXTERNAL OPERATION FUNCTION ........................................................ 44
4 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING ..................................... 46
4.1 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) ........................................................ 46
4.2 MULTIPIECE MACHINING FUNCTION .................................................... 50
4.2.1 Base Point Command of Multipiece Machining (G98)........................................50
4.2.2 MultiPiece Machining Commands (G73, G74)....................................................51
4.2.3 Setting of Machining Method for MultiPiece Machining ....................................52
4.2.4 Signal......................................................................................................................52
4.2.5 Parameter................................................................................................................53
4.2.6 Alarm and Message ................................................................................................53
4.2.7 Reference Item........................................................................................................54
4.3 YAXIS CRACK CANCEL ........................................................................... 54
5 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) ........................................................ 56
5.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .................................................................. 56
5.2 TOOL OFFSET............................................................................................ 57
5.3 TURRET AXIS CONTROL (T AXIS CONTROL) ......................................... 58
5.3.1 T Command Neglect Signal ...................................................................................61
5.3.2 Tool Change Signal ................................................................................................62
5.3.3 Turret Indexing Completion Signal........................................................................63
5.3.4 T Code Display Signal ...........................................................................................65
5.3.5 Number of Punches Signal .....................................................................................65
5.3.6 Taxis Machine Zero Point Position Signals .........................................................67
5.4 MULTIPLETOOL CONTROL ..................................................................... 69
5.5 TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION ............................................................ 76
5.6 UNREGISTERED T CODE SIGNAL............................................................ 82
5.7 MANUAL TOOL CHANGE........................................................................... 83
c-2
B-64623EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
6 CAXIS CONTROL ............................................................................... 85

6.1 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING).............................................. 85
6.2 CAXIS SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL .................................................. 86
6.3 CAXIS OFFSET FUNCTION ..................................................................... 90
6.3.1 Caxis Offset Type A.............................................................................................90
6.3.2 Caxis Offset Type B .............................................................................................92
7 TAXIS/CAXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL .................................... 98

7.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 98
7.2 SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................... 98
7.3 PARAMETER ............................................................................................ 100
7.4 CAUTION .................................................................................................. 100
8 SAFETY ZONE CHECK ...................................................................... 101
8.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 101
8.2 TYPES OF SAFTY ZONE CHECK ............................................................ 101
8.2.1 Type A..................................................................................................................101
8.2.2 Type B ..................................................................................................................102
8.3 SETTING THE SAFETY ZONE ................................................................. 104
8.4 SETTING THE TOOL SHAPE AREA ........................................................ 105
8.5 AUTOMATIC SAFETYZONE SETTING .................................................. 105
8.5.1 Workpiece Holder Detection Command ..............................................................106
8.5.2 Detecting Workpiece Holder Position Using an External Signal.........................107
8.5.3 Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone ........................................................110
8.6 SIGNAL ..................................................................................................... 111
8.7 PARAMETER ............................................................................................ 113
8.8 ALARM AND MESSAGE ........................................................................... 120
9 SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION................................................... 122
9.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 122
9.2 FUNCTION ................................................................................................ 122
9.2.1 Extending Safety Zone Check Areas....................................................................122
9.2.2 Extending Safety Zone Tool Areas ......................................................................123
9.2.3 Interference Safety Zone Area Signals <Fn228> .................................................123
9.2.4 Improving the Automatic Safetyzone Setting ....................................................123
9.3 SIGNAL ..................................................................................................... 123
9.4 PARAMETER ............................................................................................ 124
9.5 ALARM AND MESSAGE ........................................................................... 127
10 WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE FUNCTION 129
10.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 129
10.2 INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE METHODS .............................................. 130
10.2.1 Type A..................................................................................................................130
10.2.2 Type B ..................................................................................................................132
10.3 TOOL/WORKPIECE HOLDER AREAS ..................................................... 135
10.4 SIGNAL ..................................................................................................... 135
10.5 PARAMERER ............................................................................................ 136
10.6 NOTE......................................................................................................... 138
11 CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................ 139
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64623EN/01
11.1 FEED HOLD SIGNAL B/FEED HOLD LAMP SIGNAL B ........................... 139
11.2 SWITCHING THE PUNCHING AND LASER MODES............................... 140
11.3 RAPID TRAVERSE TIME CONSTANT OVERRIDE.................................. 142
11.4 SERVO PARAMETER SWITCHING FUNCTION ...................................... 143
11.4.1 Velocity Loop Gain Switching According to the Positioning Distance...............143
11.4.2 Nibbling Constant Positioning Time Control (Three Levels) ..............................144
11.4.3 Position Gain Switching Speed and PI/IP Control Selection ...............................144
11.4.4 Parameter..............................................................................................................144
11.5 NIBBLING PARAMETER SWITCHING CONTROL USING EXTERNAL
SIGNALS ................................................................................................... 147
11.6 RAM-AXIS CONTROL............................................................................... 149
11.6.1 RAM-axis Setting.................................................................................................149
11.6.2 RAM-axis Up Motion ..........................................................................................154
11.6.3 RAM-axis High Speed Pulse Distribution ...........................................................155
11.6.4 Alarm and Message ..............................................................................................167
12 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION ......................................... 168
APPENDIX
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC........................................... 181
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES .............................................................................. 181
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS..................................................................................... 187
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ................................................................187
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ..................................................................189
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)................................................................191
c-4
B-64623EN/01 1.LIST OF FUNCTIONS
1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS
Overview
For details of connections that are not related to the punch press function, refer to the FANUC Series
0i-F CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-64603EN-1). Most of the functions described in
B-64603EN-1 can be used with the FANUC Series 0i-PF. The remainder either cannot be used with the
FANUC Series 0i-PF or have different specifications when used with the FANUC Series 0i-PF. The table
below indicates whether the functions described in B-64603EN-1 can be used with the FANUC Series
0i-PF. For an explanation of the differences in the specifications, see Chapter 2.
LIST OF FUNCTIONS
The table 1 (a) below lists the functions. Each element of No. in the table is shown chapter or section
number for the corresponding item in the FANUC Series 0i-F CONNECTION MANUAL
(FUNCTION) (B-64603EN-1).
The following symbols are used in the table:
: The function can be used with the FANUC Series 0i-PF.
: The function cannot be used with the FANUC Series 0i-PF.
: The function has different specifications when used with the FANUC Series 0i-PF.
Table1 (a) List of functions

Whether
No. Item
supported
1 Axis Control
1.1 Controlled Axis : See chapter 2
1.2 Setting each Axis
1.2.1 Name of Axes
1.2.2 Increment System
1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis : See chapter 2
1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach
1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis
1.2.6 Mirror Image : See chapter 2
1.2.7 Follow-up : See chapter 2
1.2.8 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed
1.2.9 Position Switch
1.2.10 High-Speed Position Switch
1.3 Error Compensation
1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation
1.3.2 Backlash Compensation
1.3.3 Smooth Backlash
1.3.4 Straightness Compensation
1.3.5 Simple Straightness Compensation
1.3.6 Straightness Compensation at 128 Points
1.3.7 Interpolated Straightness Compensation
1.3.8 Interpolated Straightness Compensation 3072 Points
1.3.9 Inclination Compensation
1.3.10 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation
1.3.11 Extended Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation
1.3.12 Interpolation Type Pitch Error Compensation
1.3.13 About Differences among Pitch Error Compensation, Straightness
Compensation, and Inclinaiton Compensation (for Reference Purposes)
1.3.14 Axis Name Display of Pitch Error Compensation
1.3.15 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Total Value Input function
-1-
1.LIST OF FUNCTIONS B-64623EN/01
Whether
No. Item
supported
1.4 Settings Related to Servo-controlled Axes
1.5 Settings Related with Coordinate Systems
1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System
1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System
Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair
1.5.3 Local Coordinate System
1.5.4 Rotary Axis Roll-Over
1.6 Axis Synchronous Control
1.7 Tandem Control
1.8 Angular Axis Control
1.9 Electronic Gear Box (M Series)
1.10 Dual Position Feedback Turning Mode / Compensation Clamp
1.11 Function of Deceleration Stop in Case of Power Failure
1.12 Flexible Synchronization Control
1.13 Axis Immediate Stop Function
1.14 Flexible Path Axis Assignment
1.15 High Precision Oscillation Function
1.16 Peripheral Axis Control
2 Preparations for Operation
2.1 Emergency Stop
2.2 CNC Ready Signals
2.3 Overtravel Check
2.3.1 Overtravel Signals
2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1
2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 1 Area Expansion
2.3.4 Stored Stroke Check 2,3
2.3.5 Checking the Stored Stroke during the Time from Poweron to the Reference
Position Establishment
2.3.6 Stroke Limit External Setting (M Series)
2.3.7 Stroke Limit Area Changing Function
2.3.8 Stored stroke limit range switching function by signal
2.3.9 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series)
2.4 Alarm signals
2.5 Start Lock
Interlock
2.6 Mode Selection
2.7 Status Output Signal
2.8 VRDY OFF Alarm Ignore Signal
2.9 Unexpected Disturbance Torque Detection Function
2.10 Machining Condition Selection Function
2.11 Machining quality level Adjustment (M Series)
2.12 Malfunction Prevent Functions
2.13 Operator Error Prevent Functions
3 Manual Operation
3.1 JOG feed/incremental feed : See chapter 2
3.2 Manual Handle Feed
3.3 Manual Handle Interrupt
3.3.1 Manual Interruption of 3-dimensional Coordinate System Conversion
3.4 Manual Linear/Circular Interpolation
3.5 Handle-synchronous Feed
3.6 Rigid Tapping by Manual Handle
3.7 3-Dimensional Manual Feed (M Series)
3.8 Manual Numeric Command
3.9 I/O Link i Manual Handle Interface
-2-
Whether
No. Item
supported
4 Reference Position Establishment
4.1 Manual Reference Position Return
4.2 Reference Position Setting without Dog
4.3 Automatic Reference Position Return and Return from the Reference Position : See chapter 2
4.4 2nd Reference Position Return / 3rd, 4th Reference Position Return : See chapter 2
4.5 In-position Check Disable Reference Position Return
4.6 Reference Position Setting with Mechanical Stopper
4.7 Reference Position Setting with Mechanical Stopper by Grid Method
4.8 Distance Coded Linear Scale Interface
4.9 Linear Sscale with Distance-coded Reference Marks(Serial)
4.10 Extended Function of the Distance Coded Linear Scale Interface
4.11 Reference Position Signal Output Function
4.12 Correspondence of Rotary Scale without Rotary Data
4.13 Manual 2nd/3rd/4th Reference Position Return Function
5 Automatic Operation
5.1 Cycle Start/Feed Hold : See chapter 2
5.2 Reset and Rewind
5.3 Testing a Program
5.3.1 Machine Lock : See chapter 2
5.3.2 Dry Run
5.3.3 Single Block : See chapter 2
5.3.4 High-speed Program Check Function
5.3.5 Manual Handle Retrace
5.3.6 Auxiliary Function Output Block Reverse Movement for Manual Handle Retrace
5.3.7 Manual Handle Retrace Function for Multi-path
5.3.8 Extension of the Manual Handle Retrace Function
5.4 Manual Absolute ON/OFF : Manual
absolute
off is
unavailable.
5.5 Optional Block Skip/Addition of Optional Block Skip
5.6 Program Restart
5.7 Quick Program Restart
5.8 Tool Retract and Recover
5.9 Manual Intervention and Return
5.10 Retrace (M Series)
5.11 Active Block Cancel Function
5.12 Exact Stop / Exact Stop Mode / Cuttingmode
Tapping Mode
5.13 Retraction for Rigid Tapping
5.14 DNC Operation
5.15 Direct Operation by Personal Computer Function
5.16 Direct Operation by C Language Executor
5.17 Retraction for 3-dimensional Rigid Tapping
6 Interpolation Function
6.1 Positioning : See chapter 2
6.2 Single Direction Positioning
6.3 Linear Interpolation : See chapter 2
6.4 Circular Interpolation : See chapter 2
6.5 Threading
6.6 Helical Interpolation
6.7 Polar Coordinate Interpolation
6.8 Cylindrical Interpolation
6.9 Polygon Turning
-3-
Whether
No. Item
supported
6.10 Normal Direction Control (M Series) : See chapter 2
6.11 Linear Interpolation (G28, G30, G53) : G30 is
unavailable.
6.12 Nano Smoothing
6.13 Smart Tolerance Control
6.14 General Purpose Retract
7 Feedrate Control/Acceleration and Deceleration Control
7.1 feedrate control
7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate : See chapter 2
7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp
7.1.3 Feed Per Minute
7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution
7.1.5 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series)
7.1.6 Inverse Time Feed (M Series)
7.1.7 Override
7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override : See chapter 2
7.1.7.2 Feedrate override
7.1.7.3 Second feedrate override
7.1.7.4 Override cancel
7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override
7.1.9 Dwell/Auxiliary Function Time Override Function
7.1.10 External Deceleration
7.1.11 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations : See chapter 2
7.1.12 AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control I / AI Contour : See chapter 2
Control II
7.1.13 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increments C
7.2 Acceleration/Deceleration Control
7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
7.2.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration
7.2.1.2 Rapid traverse block overlap
7.2.1.3 Programmable rapid traverse overlap
7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration
7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation
7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation
7.2.5 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration
7.2.6 Corner Control
7.2.7 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse
7.2.8 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping
7.2.9 Rapid Traverse Acceleration/deceleration before Interpolation
7.3 Jerk Control (M Series)
8 Multi-path Control
9 Function for Loader Control
10 Auxiliary Function
10.1 Auxiliary Function/2nd Auxiliary Function : See chapter 2
10.2 Auxiliary Function Lock : See chapter 2
10.3 Multiple M Commands in a Single Block
10.4 High-speed M/S/T/B Interface
10.5 M Code Grouping Function
10.6 M-code Protect Function
10.7 Auxiliary Function Output in Moving Axis
11 Spindle Speed Function : See chapter 2
12 Tool Functions
12.1 Tool Functions of Lathe System
12.2 Tool Functions of Machining Center System
-4-
Whether
No. Item
supported
12.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory : Compensati
on B
and Compen
sation C is
unavailable.
12.3 Tool Management Function
12.4 Tool Compensation
12.4.1 Cutter Compensation (M Series)
Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series)
12.4.2 Tool Length Compensation (M Series)
12.4.3 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types (M Series)
12.4.4 Second Geometry Tool Offset (T Series)
12.5 Tool Life Management : See chapter 2
13 Program Command
13.1 Decimal Point Programming / Pocket Calculator Type Decimal Point
Programming
13.2 G Code System : See chapter 2
13.3 Program Configuration
13.4 Part Program Storage Size / Number of Registerable programs
13.5 Inch/Metric Conversion
13.6 Custom Macro
13.6.1 Custom Macro
13.6.2 Indirect Axis Address Command
13.6.3 Interruption Type Custom Macro
13.6.4 Embedded Macro
13.7 Canned Cycle for Drilling
13.8 Canned Cycle (T Series) / Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle (T Series)
13.9 In-feed Control (for Grinding Machine) (M Series)
13.10 Canned Grinding Cycle (for Grinding Machine)
13.11 Mirror Image for Double Turret (T Series)
13.12 Index Table Indexing (M Series)
13.13 Scaling
13.14 Coordinate System Rotation
13.15 3-dimensional Coordinate Conversion
13.16 Tilted Working Plane Indexing (M Series)
13.17 Macro Compiler / Macro Executer
13.18 Optional Angle Chamfering and Corner Rounding (M Series)
13.19 Camfering and Crner Runding (T Series)
13.20 Direct Dawing Dimensions Programming (T Series)
13.21 Pattern Data Input
13.22 G Code Preventing Buffering
14 Display / Set / Edit
14.1 Display / Set
14.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display
14.1.2 Software Operator's Panel
14.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function
14.1.4 Touch Panel Control
14.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface
14.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function
14.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal
14.1.8 Changing the Display Language by PMC Signals
14.1.9 CNC Screen Dual Display
14.1.10 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor
14.1.11 Screen Switching by Mode
-5-
Whether
No. Item
supported
14.1.12 Screen Switching at Path Switching
14.1.13 Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure function
14.1.14 Screen Hard Copy Function
14.1.15 Actual Speed Display Axis Selection Signals
14.1.16 Custom Macro Variable Name Expansion 31 Characters
14.1.17 Switching the Axis Name of an Axis Type Alarm
14.1.18 Periodic Maintenance Screen
14.1.19 Selection of display axis on the Current Position Screen
14.1.20 Power Consumption Monitor
14.1.21 Energy Saving Level Selecting Function
14.1.22 Simultaneous Displaying Axis Number Expansion Function
14.1.23 Warning Function Against Modification of Setting
14.1.24 Title Display Function in Initial Screen
14.2 Edit
14.3 Multi Path Display and Edit
14.4 High-speed Program Management
15 Input/Output of Data
15.1 RS232C Interface
15.2 External I/O Device Control
15.3 NC Data Output Function
16 Measurement
16.1 Tool Length Measurement (M Series)
16.2 Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series) / Automatic Tool Offset (T
Series)
16.3 Skip Function
16.3.1 Skip Function : See chapter 2
16.3.2 Multiple Axis Command Skip Function
16.3.3 High-speed Skip Signal
16.3.4 Continuous High-Speed Skip Function
16.3.5 Multi-step Skip
16.3.6 Torque Limit Skip Function
16.4 Compensation Value Input
17 PMC Control Function
18 Embedded Ethernet Function : Specification
for M series
19 Diagnosis Function
19.1 Servo Warning Interface
19.2 Spindle Warning Interface
19.3 Fan Motor Abnormality Monitoring Function and Communication Retry
Monitoring Function
19.4 Trouble Diagnosis
19.5 Machine Alarm Diagnosis
20 Maintenance Function
20.1 Machine State Monitoring Function
20.2 Servo/Spindle Waveform Data Output Function
-6-
B-64623EN/01 2.FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS THAT DIFFER FROM THE M SERIES
2 FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS THAT DIFFER

FROM THE M SERIES
Some of the functions described in the FANUC Series 0i-F CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
(B64603EN1) have different specifications when used with the FANUC Series 0i-PF. Chapter 2,
FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS THAT DIFFER FROM THE M SERIES, describes these differences.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
2.1 AXIS CONTROL..................................................................................................................................7

2.2 MANUAL OPERATION......................................................................................................................8
2.3 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ...................................................................................9
2.4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION .............................................................................................................11
2.5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION........................................................................................................12
2.6 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL ........................14
2.7 AUXILIARY FUNCTION .................................................................................................................18
2.8 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION ..........................................................................................................19
2.9 TOOL FUNCTIONS...........................................................................................................................19
2.10 PROGRAM COMMAND...................................................................................................................20
2.11 SKIP FUNCTION...............................................................................................................................22
2.1 AXIS CONTROL
2.1.1 Controlled Axis

Difference
The maximum number of machine groups, maximum number of paths, and maximum number of axes
differ depending on the model, as listed in the Table2.1.1 (a).
Table2.1.1 (a)
Series 0i-PF
Maxim m number of machine groups 1
Maximum number of paths 1
Maximum number of axes 7
NOTE
The maximum numbers above vary with the option configuration. For details,
refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
2.1.2 Specifying the Rotation Axis

Difference
When the turret axis control and C-axis control are used, the turret axis and C axis should be set as a
rotation axis (i.e. bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1).
-7-
2.FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS THAT DIFFER FROM THE M SERIES B-64623EN/01
CAUTION
Setting the following parameters allows the CNC to be compatible with FANUC
Series 0i-PC, as follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No.1006=1
Rotary axis (A type)
Bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter No.1006=0
Bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008=1 The rotary axis roll-over is valid.
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 The axis rotates in the direction in which
the distance to the target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the
amount of the shift per one rotation
2.1.3 Mirror Image

Difference
The following are not inverted:
Direction of manual operation
Motion toward the reference position in an automatic reference position return
Repositioning
Motion of tool position compensation and Caxis position compensation
CAUTION
If the value of the Taxis mirror image is set to 1, the amount of travel is inverted,
resulting in incorrect turret indexing. (Never specify this setting.)
2.1.4 Follow-up
Difference
CAUTION
When the Taxis control function is used, the servooff signal is generally used for a
shot pin after Taxis positioning. If the *FLWU signal is set to 0, the followup function
operates and sets the Taxis machine position signal and turret indexing completion
signal to 0. If this occurs, turret indexing by a subsequent T command will result in
incorrect positioning.
When turning the servooff signal on or off during Taxis control or automatic operation,
set the *FLWU signal to 1 in advance.
2.2 MANUAL OPERATION
2.2.1 Jog Feed/Incremental Feed

Difference
The jog feedrate override for T and C axes can be specified by the input signal different from the *JV0 to
*JV15 signals <Gn010 to Gn011>.
Jog federate is clamped at manual rapid traverse rate. However, when bit 0 (NJD) of parameter No.16502
is set to 0, jog federate cannot be clamped at manual rapid traverse rate.
-8-
Signal
Jog feedrate override signals for T and C axes *JVT1<Gn233.0>, *JVT2<Gn233.1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Selects the jog feedrate override for T and C axes
[Operation] These signals are consist of two signals. The relations between these signals, and the jog
feedrate override are as follows.
*JVT2 *JVT1 Jog feedrate override

<Gn233.1> <Gn233.0> for T and C axes
0 0 100%
0 1 75%
1 0 50%
1 1 25%
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn233 *JVT2 *JVT1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16052 TJG NJC
[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path
#0 NJC The jog federate:

0 : Is clamped at manual rapid traverse rate.
1 : Not beclamped at manual rapid traverse rate.
#5 TJG The jog feedrate override signals for T and C axes *JVT1<Gn233.0>, *JVT2<Gn233.1>
are:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
2.3 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
2.3.1 Automatic Reference Position Return and Return from

the Reference Position
Difference
The command with automatic reference position return (G28) is consist of the two methods as follows.
Setting bit 0 (SZR) of parameter No.16205 allows to select one from of them.
- The axis returns directly to the reference position without passing through any intermediate points.
- The axis returns to the reference position via the specified intermediate point.
Return from reference position (G29) cannot be used.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16205 SZR

-9-
#0 SZR Automatic reference position return (G28) commands:

0: The axis returns directly to the reference position without passing through any
intermediate points.
1: The axis returns to the reference position via the specified intermediate point.
2.3.2 2nd Reference Position Return Signals / 3rd, 4th Reference

Position Return Signals
Difference
The signal post notification that the tool is wihtin the distance of the parameters from the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th
reference position after the reference position has been established by a reference position return.
Signal
2nd refernce position return signals ZP21~ZP28<Fn096>
3rd refernce position return signals ZP31~ZP38<Fn098>
4th refernce position return signals ZP41~ZP48<Fn100>
[Classification] Output signal

[Function] These signal notify the PMC that each axis positions between the reference position for
each axis and the position specified in the corresponding parameter.
A numeric character appended to the end of a signal represents a controlled axis number,
and a numeric character immediately following ZP represents a reference position
number.
ZP
: 2 Second reference position return
3 Third reference position return
4 Fourth reference position return
: 1 Return end signal for the first axis

2 Return end signal for the second axis
3 Return end signal for the third axis
: :
: :
[Output cond.] These signals turn to 1 when:

- The coordinate in the machine coordinate system is in the range between each of the
2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position for each axis and the position specified in the
corresponding parameter after the reference position establishment.
These signals turn to 0 when:
- The coordinate in the machine coordinate system is not the range between each of
the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position for each axis and the position specified in the
corresponding parameter
- An emergency stop is applied.
- A servo alarm is raised.
CAUTION
The output cycle of the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference retun signal is
64msec.
- 10 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn096 ZP28 ZP27 ZP26 ZP25 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21
Parameter
16600 Width for which the second reference position signal is output on each axis
16601 Width for which the third reference position signal is output on each axis
16602 Width for which the fourth reference position signal is output on each axis

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
The parameters specify the width for the second, third, or fourth reference position of the
machine coordinate system. The second, third, or fourth reference position signal is
output within the range shown below:
Position specified in parameter No.1241, 1242, or 1243
Value specified in Value specified in

parameter No.16600, parameter No.16600,
16601, or 16602 16601, or 16602
Negative direction Positive direction
Second, third, or fourth reference position signal for which are output
2.4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
2.4.1 Cycle Start/Feed Hold

Difference of Feed Hold
(a) Nibbling mode
When the *SP signal is set to 0 during positioning to the first punch point in nibbling mode,
positioning stops. This sets the STL signal to 0 and the SPL signal to 1, such that the system
enters the feed hold state.
- 11 -
Also, when the *SP signal is set to 0 during pitch movement from the first punch point to the last
punch point, the system enters the feed hold state. The system can enter the feed hold state after a
pitch movement which sets the *SP signal to 0 provided the NSP bit (bit 2 of parameter No.
16181) is set accordingly. If this setting is made, press start signal PF and nibbling signal NBL are
set to 0 when press stop signal *PE is set to 0.
(b) Workpiece holder escape mode

If the *SP signal is set to 0 in escape mode, the system stops after the escape is completed.
2.4.2 Machine Lock

Difference
Even in the machine lock state, the press function and external operation function can be executed. So,
miscellaneous function lock signal AFL, Tcommand ignore signal TNG, and press start lock signal PFL
should all be set to 1 and external operation function selection signal EFS to 0 in the machine lock
state.
2.4.3 Single Block

Difference
If the SBK signal is set to 1 while a pattern such as a bolt hole circle (G26) is being specified, the
operation does not stop at the end of each program block. It stops only after the tool has been positioned
to each punch point and punching completed. In this case, feed hold signal SPL is set to 1 when the
cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0, posting notification that it is not the end of a single block of the
program. Once the operation of one block has been completed, both the STL and SPL signals are set to
0 and the operation stops.
If the SBK signal is set to 1 during nibbling or automatic repositioning, a stop is made upon the
completion of a series of actions.
2.5 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
2.5.1 Positioning
Difference
In G00 mode, punching is executed after the completion of axial movements. Generally, the F command
cannot be specified in G00 mode. The F command can be specified only when the G0F bit (bit 0 of
parameter No. 16050) is set accordingly.
For Tor Caxis command blocks, nonlinear interpolation positioning is performed, even if linear
interpolation positioning is specified.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16050 G0F
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
beforeoperation is continued.

- 12 -
#0 G0F For a rapid traverse command (G00), the Xaxis or Yaxis rapid traverse feedrate is set to
the value:
0: Specified in the parameter.
1: Specified by the F code.
The maximum feedrate of the F command is limited to the rapidtraverse feedrate in the
parameter. Bit 0 (OADx) of parameter No.6131 and bit 0 (ILG) of No. 6132 are valid.
2.5.2 Linear Interpolation

Difference
The alarm (PS4600) is issued when The C-axis command or T-axis command is used during G01 mode
(the nibbling mode is excluded).
Alarm and Message

Number Message Description
PS4600 T,C COMMAND IN INTERPOLATION In the linear interpolation(G01) mode or circular
iterpolation(G02,G03) mode, a T command or C-axis
command was specified.
2.5.3 Circular Interpolation

Difference
The alarm (PS4600) is issued when The C-axis command or T-axis command is used during G02 or G03
mode (the nibbling mode is excluded).
Alarm and Message

PS4600 T,C COMMAND IN INTERPOLATION In the linear interpolation(G01) mode or circular
iterpolation(G02,G03) mode, a T command or C-axis
command was specified.
2.5.4 Normal Direction Control

Difference
Under normal direction control, a punch press shears a sheet while holding the sheet and moving the tool
with interpolation. The cutting of an arc should be programmed as follows: Linear positioning is
performed with the Caxis set in the direction normal to the tangential direction at the start point of the
arc; The sheet is held by the PF signal; A Caxis normaldirection movement is made with circular
interpolation. The program should be created so that an arc and a straight line are connected by a tangent
even in the normal direction control mode.
Example
G92X1525Y1525
G90
T201
G70X500Y200 Positioning for creating a tangent at the start point of the arc
G41.1 (G70: Positioning and press off command)
G00X500Y500 Positioning to the arc start point with the Caxis set in the direction normal to
the direction of the arc tangent.
The PF signal lowers the rams to hold the sheet.
G03X421.14Y459.17I-50F5000
G40.1
- 13 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16363 NDD NDC NDB

#1 NDB Positioning under normal direction control is carried out:

0: According to the specification for the 0iM.
1: By handling the Caxis angle immediately before the beginning of the normal
direction control mode, as an offset value.
#3 NDC Positioning under normal direction control is carried out:

0: According to the specification for the 0iM.
1: By handling the Caxis angle immediately before the beginning of the normal
direction control mode, as the direction normal to the next traveling direction.
NOTE
When bit 1 (NDB) and bit 3 (NDC) of parameter No. 16363 are set
to 1, the movement specified by bit 1 (NDB) of parameter No.
16363 has priority over the movement by bit 3 (NDC) of parameter
No. 16363.
#7 NDD When circular interpolation (G02, G03) is specified under normal direction control and
the rotation insertion angle calculated during normal direction control does not exceed the
value is set in the parameter No.5482,:
0 : The CNC gentles normal direction control axis simultaneously with the X/Y-axis
motion.(FANUC Series 0i-PC system compatible specification)
1 : The CNC moves normal direction control axis to the end of the block. (FANUC
Series 0i-PF system specification)
2.6 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND

DECELERATION CONTROL
2.6.1 Rapid Traverse Rate

Difference
Punching starts once positioning has been completed.
Usually, the F command cannot be used together with G00 command. Setting bit 0 (G0F) of parameter
No.16050 allows that the F command is used together with G00 command.
A rapid traverse rate is overridden by the following values when a switch is pressed on the machine
operators panel:
25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
- 14 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16050 NCT N3S PCF G0F
NOTE

#0 G0F For a rapid traverse command (G00), the Xaxis or Yaxis rapid traverse feedrate is set to
the value:
0: Specified in the parameter.
1: Specified by the F code.
The maximum feedrate of the F command is limited to the rapidtraverse feedrate in the
parameter. Bit 0 (OADx) of parameter No.6131 and bit 0 (ILG) of No. 6132 are valid.
2.6.2 Rapid Traverse Override

Difference
In automatic rapid traverse, the rapid traverse rate can be overridden by the value determined by the
ROV1<Gn014.0> and ROV2<Gn014.1> signals.
ROV2 ROV1 Rapid traverse rate

<Gn014.1> <Gn014.0> T, C axes Excluding T, C axes
0 0 100% 100%
0 1 100% 75%
1 0 50% 50%
1 1 50% 25%
When the bit (G0F) of parameter No. 16050 is set to 0, the number of one degit from1 to 4 after F code
stated allows the rapid traverse rate in automatic operation is overridden.
One-digit F feed code Override by one-digit F feed code

F1 100%
F2 75%
F3 50%
F4 25%
If the function for positioning byoptimum accelerations is used (bit 0 (OADx) of parameter No. 6131 is
set to 1), linear acceleration/deceleration is executed according to the overridden rapid traverse rate of the
corresponding level and the specified time constant.
For positioning under constant positioning time control (bit 6 (PT2j) of parameter No. 16844 is set to 1),
rapid traverse override is disabled and is always set to 100%.
2.6.3 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations

Difference
In automatic rapid traverse, the velocity loop integral gain, velocity loop proportional gain, and time
during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning can be switched according to the travel distance for
individual axes, as specified in the parameters (Nos. 6136 to 6138, and Nos. 11230 to 11232). By using
this function, positioning accuracy can be improved. (Up to seven levels)
- 15 -
In automatic rapid traverse, positioning for the Xand Yaxes can be executed in a specified period,
independently of the positioning distance.
If this function is used in nibbling mode, positioning can always be completed within a specified period,
irrespective of the length of the nibbling pitch. This enables smooth punching. (Two levels)
NOTE
This function is invalid for PMCcontrolled axes.
Parameter
16828 Velocity loop integral gain for first stage
16829 Velocity loop integral gain for second stage
16830 Velocity loop integral gain for third stage
16831 Velocity loop integral gain for fourth stage
16832 Velocity loop integral gain for fifth stage
16833 Velocity loop integral gain for sixth stage
16834 Velocity loop integral gain for seventh stage

[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
When using sevenstage velocity loop gain switching, use these parameters to set the
velocity loop integral gains. (Equivalent to parameter No. 2043)
NOTE
1 These parameters are valid when bit 5 (VCG) of parameter No.
16051 is set to 1.
2 Only the settings for the X and Yaxes are valid.
16835 Velocity loop proportional gain for first stage
16836 Velocity loop proportional gain for second stage
16837 Velocity loop proportional gain for third stage
16838 Velocity loop proportional gain for fourth stage
16839 Velocity loop proportional gain for fifth stage
16840 Velocity loop proportional gain for sixth stage
16841 Velocity loop proportional gain for seventh stage

[Valid data range] -32767 to 32767
- 16 -
velocity loop proportional gains. (Equivalent to parameter No. 2044)
NOTE
1 These parameters are valid when bit 5 (VCG) of parameter No.
16051 is set to 1.
16857 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for first stage
16858 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for second stage
16859 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for third stage
16860 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for fourth stage
16861 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for fifth stage
16862 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for sixth stage
16863 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for seventh stage

[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] msec
Set the time during which the press start signal PF<Y004.2> is set to 1 prior to the end
of the positioning corresponding to each stage in positioning by optimum acceleration
(the press start signal PF<Y004.2> early output function).
These parameters are valid for an axis for which positioning by optimum accelerations is
enabled (bit 0 (OADx) of parameter No.6131 is set to 1).
NOTE
If this parameter is set by negative number, the CNC set the press
start signal PF<Y004.2> to 1 when the time set in this parameter
elapses after the end of the positioning.
16878 Positioning time for first stage (when rapid traverse override is 100% or 75%)
16879 Positioning time for second stage (when rapid traverse override is 100% or 75%)
16880 Positioning time for first stage (when rapid traverse override is 50% or 25%)
16881 Positioning time for second stage (when rapid traverse override is 50% or 25%)

[Unit of data] msec
When using constant positioning time control, set the positioning time for the first and
second stages, for each axis.
- 17 -
NOTE
These parameters are valid for those axes for which both bits 0
(OADx) of parameter No. 6131 and 6 (PT2x) of parameter No.
16844 are set to 1.
2.6.4 AI Advanced Preview Control / AI Contour Control I

Difference
CAUTION
1 In punching mode, AI Advanced Preview Control / AI Contour Control I function cannot be
used by Series 0i-PF.
2 AI Contour Control II function cannot be used by Series 0i-PF.
3 In AI contour control mode, programmable parameter input (G10) must not be used.
2.7 AUXILIARY FUNCTION
2.7.1 Auxiliary Function/2nd Auxiliary Function

Difference of Auxiliary Function (M code)
The DEN signal is set to 1 when all axis movement is ended and enters the in-position status in the
following block:
- In the punching block.
- In the block where extra operarion function can be used (output the EF signal).
(In both case, the DEN signal is set to 1 when the press start lock signal PFL is set to 1 and
punching operation or extra operation function is not used, actually.)
If a specification is made to set the press start signal (PF) to 1 before the completion of positioning, the
external operation function signal (EF) is also set to 1 before the completion of positioning.
The DEN signal should be used as a gate signal for starting operation after movement when the external
operation function is used.
Difference of 2nd Auxiliary Function (B code)

CAUTION
When the 2nd auxiliary function is provided, the A/B macro function cannot be used to
store and call a specified pattern.
2.7.2 Auxiliary Function Lock

Difference
The internal processing for the following M codes is executed, independently of the AFL signal:
- Forming mode, forming mode cancel
- Nibbling mode, nibbling mode cancel
- Workpiece clamp, workpiece unclamp
- Switching between punch mode and laser mode
These M codes can be output, even when the AFL signal is set to 1, by setting the PMA bit accordingly
(bit 5 of parameter No. 16001).
- 18 -
2.8 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

Difference
Scode output and analog voltage control by the PMC are possible. The other spindle control functions
cannot be used.
2.9 TOOL FUNCTIONS
2.9.1 Tool Life Management

Difference
The function sets the maximum punch count for each tool on the screen. If the actual punch count for a
selected tool exceeds the predetermined maximum punch count, tool expired signal PTLCH is output.
Upon detecting this signal, the PMC outputs an alarm or instructs the operator to change the tool.
Signal
Tool expired signal PTLCH<Fn232.0>
[Function] Posts notification that the tool has reached the end of its service life.
[Output cond.] The signal is set to 1 in the following cases:
- When the T command is specified when the actual punch count of the corresponding
tool has exceeded the predetermined maximum punch count, that is, when the tool
has reached the end of its service life.
- When the actual punch count for the corresponding tool exceeds the predetermined
maximum punch count, that is, when the tool reaches the end of its service life,
during punching after the T command has been specified.
The signal is set to 0 in the following cases:

- When the CNC enters the reset state.
- When the actual punch count is preset, or a value less than the maximum punch
count is entered.
- When a tool which has not yet reached the end of its service life is selected.
CAUTION
1 This signal is not output if the maximum punch count (tool life) is
set to 0.
2 During the multiple-tool control is used, when the tool data setting
function is provided and bit 5 (CMT) of parameter No.16282 is set
to 0, the number of punches and the maximum number of punches
(i.e tool life) are set by each sub tool. Therfore, the tool expired
signal PTLCH<Fn232.0> can be managed by each sub tool.
3 During the multiple-tool control is used, when the tool data setting
function is provided and bit 5 (CMT) of parameter No.16282 is set
to 1, or the tool data setting function is not provided, the number of
punches and the maximum number of punches (i.e tool life) are set
by each sub tool set by each tool holder. Therfore, the tool expired
signal PTLCH<Fn232.0> cannot be managed by each sub tool. So,
the PTLCH signal is managed by each tool holder.
- 19 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn232 PTLCH
2.10 PROGRAM COMMAND
2.10.1 G Code System

Difference
A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block.
G codes are divided into the following two types.
Type Meaning
One-shot G code The G code is effective only in the block in which it is specified.
Modal G code The G code is effective until another G code of the same group is specified.
Example
G01 and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.
G01X_ ;
Y_ ; G01 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G00Y_ ; G00 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G01X_ ;
:
1. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set at power-up or reset, the modal G
codes are placed in the states described below.
(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with as indicated in Table.
(2) G20 and G21 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at power-up or reset.
(3) Which status G22 or G23 at power on is set by bit 7 (G23) of parameter No. 3402. However,
G22 and G23 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at reset.
(4) The user can select G00 or G01 by setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter No. 3402.
(5) The user can select G90 or G91 by setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter No. 3402.
(6) The user can select G17, G18, or G19 by setting bits 1 (G18) and 2 (G19) of parameter No.
3401.
2. G codes other than G10 and G11 are one-shot G codes.
3. When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified, or a G code that has no corresponding
option is specified, alarm PS0010 occurs.
4. Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if each G code belongs to a different group.
If multiple G codes that belong to the same group are specified in the same block, only the last G
code specified is valid.
5. G codes are indicated by group.
6. There are two G code systems in FANUC Series 0i-PF: A and B (Table2.10 (a)). Select a G code
system using bit 6 (GSB) of parameter No. 3401.
- 20 -
Table2.10 (a) G code list

G code system
Group Function
A B
G00 G00 Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G04 G04 Dwell
G05.1 G05.1 AI Advanced Preview Control / AI contour control (*1)
G05.4 G05.4 HRV3 on/off
G08 G08 AI contour control (advanced preview control compatible
00
command) (*1)
G09 G09 Exact stop
G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G17 G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 G20 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 Input in mm
G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G26 G26 Bolt hole circle
G28 G50 Automatic reference point return
G32 G32 Automatic safety zone setting
00
G33 G33 Skip function
G38 G38 Bending compensation X
G39 G39 Bending compensation X
G40 G40 Tool radius compensation : cancel
G41 G41 07 Tool radius compensation : left
G42 G42 Tool radius compensation : right
G40.1(G150) G40.1(G150) Normal direction control cancel mode
G41.1(G151) G41.1(G151) 18 Normal direction control on : left
G42.1(G152) G42.1(G152) Normal direction control on : right
G45 G45 Linear punching
G46 G46 00 Circular punching (CW)
G47 G47 Circular punching (CCW)
G50 G34 Scaling cancel
11
G51 G35 Scaling
G50.1 G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 G50.1 Programmable mirror image
G52 G93 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
14
G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G62 G62 15 Automatic corner override
G64 G64 Cutting mode
G65 G95 00 Macro call
G66 G96 12 Macro modal call A
- 21 -
G code system
Group Function
A B
G66.1 G66.1 Macro modal call B
G67 G97 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 G68 Circular nibbling
G69 G69 Linear nibbling
G70 G70 Positioning & press off
G72 G72 Standard point command
G73 G75 Multipiece machining command X
G74 G76 00 Multipiece machining command Y
G75 G27 Automatic repositioning
G76 G28 Line at angle
G77 G29 Arc
G78 G36 Grid
G79 G37 Grid
G84 G84 Coordinate system rotation start
16
G85 G85 Coordinate system rotation cancel
G86 G66 Share proof
G87 G67 Square
00
G88 G78 Radius
G89 G79 Cut at angle
G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
G91 G91 Incremental programming
G91.1 G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
G92 G92 Setting for workpiece coordinate system
00
G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G98 G98 Coordinate system setting (Multipiece machining)
*1 : In punching mode, AI Contour Control I function cannot be used.
2.11 SKIP FUNCTION
2.11.1 Skip Function

Difference
G33 is used to specify the function. When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the address of the
input signal is SKIP <X004.0>.
- 22 -
B-64623EN/01 3.PRESSING FUNCTION
3 PRESSING FUNCTION
Chapter 3, PRESSING FUNCTION, consists of the following sections:
3.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1CYCLE PRESSING)..................................................................................23

3.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF ...................................................................................................25
3.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION.....................................................................................................................25
3.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION .........................................................................................................27
3.5 PRESS FUNCTION............................................................................................................................28
3.6 EXTERNAL OPERATION FUNCTION ...........................................................................................44
3.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1CYCLE PRESSING)

Overview
This control sends a signal Start press and punch to the machine after moving a tool to the position
commanded in a predetermined block. When the machine receives this signal, it starts pressing. As a
result, punching is made on a workpiece by the selected tool. After punching, the press motion stops, and
a signal returns to the NC to indicate that punch has finished.
Thus, NC proceeds to the execution of the next block. In this manner, punching on a workpiece by press
motion is executed by data transfer between the NC and the machine, and it is necessary to know the
blocks to be punched, in advance.
This description is made from the viewpoints of the NC side. Since details may differ depending upon the
machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool builders manual without fail. For details of the pressing
function, refer to section 3.5.
3.1.1 Block in which Punching is Made

Overview
Punching is made in a block where the Xaxis or Yaxis is positioned at rapid traverse, in principle.
In other words, punching is not done in a block where the Xaxis or Yaxis is not positioned at rapid
traverse. Blocks where punching is done are as follows:
(1) Block where Xaxis or Yaxis is positioned in the positioning mode (G00)
CAUTION
If the same position as the present tool position is commanded by address X or
Y, positioning is not done, but punching is executed. (This is regarded as the
positioning command with movement amount 0)
G00G91X0; . . . Punching is made.
This applies to such a case that punching is done at the same position using a
different tool.
- 23 -
3.PRESSING FUNCTION B-64623EN/01
Tool 01 profile
Tool 02 profile
N711G00G90X50.0Y30.0T02; . . . Punching is made using tool 02
N712X50.0Y30.0T01; . . . Punching is made using tool 01

The punch profile at (50, 30) position is as shown below.
No punching is made in case of N712T01;, N712T01C50.01;
Fig.3.1 (a) Example of punching operation
CAUTION
Punching is not done in T single block where the Xaxis or Yaxis moves for tool
offset.
(2) Block where pattern function G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, G86, G87 or G89 was
commanded
Punching is made after positioning to respective points on a pattern.
Punching is not done in the following cases, even if the block corresponds to (1) or (2).
(a) MDI mode is selected.
(b) M code is commanded.
(c) Blocks inserted between M code of workpiece clamp and M code of workpiece unclamp which
are employed for repositioning of workpiece.
(d) Block where positioning & punch off (G70) was commanded.
CAUTION
Punching is not done even in G00 mode if the block is irrespective of positioning such
as coordinate system setting (G92), local coordinate system setting (G52), standard
point command (G72), dwell (G04), etc.
- 24 -
3.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF

Overview
Punching is made in a block where the Xaxis or Yaxis if positioned at rapid traverse, in principle.
Command the following code, if it is not desired to punch a workpiece after positioning a tool to the
commanded position at rapid traverse.
G70X__Y__;
CAUTION
1 G70 is an oneshot G code.
2 Rapid traverse is made in a G70 block even if in G01, G02 or G03 mode.
3.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION

Overview
Nibbling means sequential repeated punching without stopping press motion.
Assume Tt be the time required for onecycle press motion. The remaining time obtained by subtracting
punching time Tp from Tt (or, Ti = Tt Tp) is the time allowable for positioning.
Flywheel
Position of tool
Upper dead
Crank mechanism point
workpiece
Lower dead
Tool for point
punching Tp Ti
Position Tt
Tt : One cycle in press motion
Time Tp : Processing time of press motion
Ti : Positioning time for the workpiece
Fig.3.3 (a) Nibbling
The maximum distance (maximum pitch) which can be positioned in time Ti is limited by various
conditions, such as machine, servo motor, and others as well as time Ti.
In this NC, the maximum nibbling pitch determined by these conditions is preset to parameter (Nos.16186
and 16188).
On the other hand, the nibbling pitch is commanded by a program. If the commanded pitch exceeds the
maximum pitch preset by the parameter, an alarm is produced.
Since this pitch can be specified directly, programming can be done, while taking the scallop into
consideration.
- 25 -
Scallop s
p
d
The relation between pitch p and scallop s is as shown below in case of

linear nibbling
p=2 d s s2
where d: Tool diameter
Fig.3.3 (b) Relation between pitch and scallop
The following functions are prepared for nibbling.
Table3.3 (a) Functions for nibbling

Function Description
Punching at constant intervals (distance) #n
along the Circular arc for a specified d
#2
r
Circular nibbling (G68) angle. p #1

G68 I r J K P d Q p
Punching at constant intervals (distance) d
along the straight line for a specified l
#n
Linear nibbling (G69) distance. p

G69 I l J P d Q p #1 #2
M## M code of nibbling mode(Set value of parameter No.16183)

The route and the pitch are specified according to these
Nibbling by M function
command
M$$ M code of nibbling mode cancel
(Set value of parameter No.16184)
- 26 -
CAUTION
1 The maximum pitches in G68 and G69 are set by parameter No. 16186.
2 If T code is commanded in G68 or G69 block, nibbling is started after the X and
Y axes have moved to the first punch point and also a tool has been selected.
3 M code is not commandable in G68 and G69 blocks.
4 For the rapid traverse to the first punch point, the rapid traverse override is
effective when it is specified by the rapid traverse override switch on the
machine operators panel or by F1digit specification. For the pitch movement up
to the final point, the rapid traverse override is ineffective and fixed to 100%.
5 If G68 or G69 is commanded using the single block operation, nibbling is made
up to the last punch point, and then, stopped.
6 If feed hold is applied halfway during the movement to the first punch point, the
X and Y axes stop at once.
These axes also stop immediately when the feed hold is applied halfway during
the pitch movement from the first point to the last point.
However, this can be changed by bit 2 (NSP) of parameter No.16181 in such a
way that the X and Y axes stop after pitch movement.
7 In a block just after G68 or G69, the tool does not move by the incremental
amount from the tool position when nibbling ends, but moves from the
programmed end point of the arc or straight line by the incremental amount.
Parameter
Refer to parameters No.16181 to No. 16194 in the parameter manual (B64630EN).
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64624EN) NIBBLING FUNCTION
3.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION

Overview
In addition to the circular or linear nibbling according to the G68 or G69 command, this control can
perform nibbling by M function. In other words, it can execute nibbling in the blocks from a block with
the M code of nibbling mode to a block with the M code of nibbling mode cancel as shown below.
M12; (M code of nibbling mode)

Nibbling is done in these blocks.

M13; (M code of nibbling mode cancel)
In this manual, the M code of nibbling mode is described as M12, while the M code of the nibbling mode
cancel is described as M13. However, since these M codes may be different from those specified above in
certain machine tool builders, you are requested to read these M codes correspondingly according to the
manual prepared by these machine tool builders.
Dont use this nibbling by M function in a different way other than specified in this manual, since there
are certain restriction about its use.
- 27 -
CAUTION
1 Each of the M codes for nibbling mode and nibbling mode cancel must be
commanded in a single block.
2 The following commands only are executable in nibbling mode.
(i) X, Y positioning command by G00 Provided that the T code and F1digit
command can be included in the same block where the X, Y positioning is
made by G00 to the first punch point of nibbling.
(ii) G26 (bolt hole circle), G76 (line at angle), G77 (arc), G78, G79 (grid), G86
(share proofs), G87 (square), G88 (radius), G89 (cut at angle)
The movement amounts along the Xaxis and Yaxis to respective positioning
points should not exceed the parameter set value (No. 16188), except when
the first positioning point is equivalent to the first punch point of nibbling.
(iii) G01, G02, G03, G41 and G42 commands.
3 The positioning distance commandable by the XY positioning command by G00
is not composite distance x + y obtained by the movement amounts along
2 2
Xaxis and Yaxis.

If the absolute value of the movement amount along either Xaxis or Yaxis
exceeds the parameter set value (No.16188), alarm (PS4521) is issued.
This provision also applies to G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, G86, G87, G88 and
G89, correspondingly.
4 When offset was made by the tool diameter by G41 or G42 to G01, G02 and
G03 as described, the offset straight line or circular arc is divided by the pitch
commanded by address Q.
Be careful since the above division differs form such a case that a commanded
circular arc is divided by a commanded pitch, like in G68 (circular nibbling).
Parameter
Refer to parameter No.16181 to No. 16194 in the parameter manual (B64630EN).
Reference item
OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64624EN) NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION
3.5 PRESS FUNCTION
3.5.1 1Cycle Press

Overview
In the punching block, the PF signal goes to 1 after positioning if tape or memory command input is
already selected. In the machine tool, this signal makes the press start for punch operation. When the time
set in parameter No. 16030 elapses after the *PE signal goes to 0, the PF signal goes to 0. Use the
*PE signal to stop the press.
When the time set in parameter No. 16040 elapses after the *PFIN signal goes to 0, processing goes to
the next block.
- 28 -
Press
Position of 1cycle press process

press axis The starting position of press
movement stopping
Press movement
The position that the tool is
pulled out from the work
Work (Punch completion)
Press start signal

PF<Y004.2>
t1
Press stop signal
*PE<X004.7>
Punch finish signal for1

cycle press
*PFIN <X004.5>
Axis of X, Y
Next block
positioning
Axis monement
t2
t1 : Parameter No.16030
t2 : Parameter No.16040
Fig.3.5.1 (a) 1cycle press process
Several parameters for the PF signal can be used to adjust the timing of 1cycle press.
The PF signal can be set to 1 before the end of positioning depending on setting in parameter No.
16012. If the set time is longer than the time required for deceleration during axial movement, the PF
signal goes to 1 at the same time deceleration starts. If the condition for setting the PF signal to 1 is
satisfied in all X, Y, and Caxes, the PF signal goes to 1 during simultaneous positioning for each
axis.
- 29 -
Xaxis positioning
Axis movement
tX Set time for Xaxis
Yaxis positioning
Axis movement tY Set time for Yaxis
Caxis positioning
Axis movement
tC Set time for Caxis
Press start signal

PF<Y004.2>
tX : Parameter No.16012 (set time for Xaxis)
tY : Parameter No.16012 (set time for Yaxis)
tC : Parameter No.16012 (set time for Caxis)
Fig.3.5.1 (b) Quick generation of the PF signal
NOTE
The timer for quick generation of the PF signal can be set for up to seven steps for each
of axes using parameters OADx (bit 0 of parameter No. 6131) according to the
positioning distance.
With the X and Yaxes, the PF signal can be set to 1 with bit 1 (PFE) of parameter No. 16001 and bit
3 (PE2) of parameter No. 16001 when the absolute value of the positional deviation becomes equal to or
less than the value set in parameter No. 16010. The quick timer described above is enabled when the PF
signal is set to 1.
To clamp the hit rate, the shortest time required for the steps from setting the *PFIN signal to 0 to
setting the PF signal to 1 can be specified with parameter No. 16036. The PF signal is not set to 1
until the specified time elapses even when the tool completes positioning for the next block and all
conditions for setting the PF signal to 1 are already satisfied after the *PFIN signal goes to 0.
In the block between the M code for entering the forming mode (setting in parameter No. 16008) and the
M code for canceling the forming mode (setting in parameter No. 16009), the PF signal goes to 1 after
the time set in parameter No. 16032 elapses. When the time set in parameter No. 16033 elapses after the
*PFIN signal goes to 0, processing goes to the next block.
- 30 -
t1
Axis
Axis movement positioning Next block
Press start signal

PF <Y004.2>
t2
Press stop signal
*PE <X004.7>
Punch finish signal
for 1cycle press
*PFIN<X004.5> t3
Machine side
processing
(1) (2) (3)

(1):Press start
(2):Completion of press start
(3):Beginning of press stop
t1 : Time set in parameter No. 16032
Fig.3.5.1 (c) 1cycle press process in the forming mode
NOTE
1 Bit 5 (TCF) of parameter No.16003 can be used to set the PF signal to 1.
2 The PF signal goes to 0 in case of emergency stop, external reset, or reset when the
PF signal is 1. However, the PF signal can be set to 0 after the *PE signal is set to
0 according to setting in bit 2 (RPF) of parameter No.16000.
Signal
Press start signal PF<Y004.2>
[Function] In a punching block, this signal notifies the state of press start.
[Output cond.] Please refer to above "Overview " for details.
Press stop signal *PE<X004.7>

[Function] Stops press start.
[Operation] Please refer to above "Overview " for details.
Punch finish signal for 1cycle press *PFIN<X004.5>

[[Function] signifies the comletion of punching operation for 1-cycle press.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 *PE *PFIN
- 31 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y004 PF
NOTE
1 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the *PE, *PFIN signals are placed
in X004 shown above.
2 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the *PE, *PFIN signals are placed
in the X addresses set by parameter No. 16045. (The bit positions do not
change.)
3 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the multistage skip signals SKIP2
to SKIP8 and the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP are disabled. It amounts to
this, the multi-step skip function and the skip of PMC axis control cannot be
used.
4 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the mutistage skip signals SKIP2
to SKIP8 and the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP are enabled. In this case,
each signal should by all means be plased in the corresponding X address by
setting parameters No.3012, No.3019, No.16045.
5 When bit 3 (YSG) of parameter No. 16000 is 0, the PF signals are placed in
Y004 shown above.
6 When bit 3 (YSG) of parameter No. 16000 is 1, the PF signals are placed in the
Y addresses set by parameter No. 16046. (The bit positions do not change.)
WARNING
If the address assigned as signal PF, *PE, or *PFIN is used by another usage, it
may cause an unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must
prevent the competition of the used address.
3.5.2 Continuous Press (Nibbling)

Overview
When tape or memory command input is selected, linear or circular nibbling can be performed in the
block between the G68 or G69 code or the M code for entering the nibbling mode (setting of parameter
No. 16183) and the M code for canceling the nibbling mode (setting of parameter No. 16184). When the
time set in parameter No. 16034 elapses after the tool is positioned at the first punch point, the PF signal
goes to 1. In the machine tool, this signal makes the press start for punch operation.
In nibbling, the PF signal goes to 1 at the same time the NBL signal goes to 1. Since the PF and NBL
signals remain 1 till nibbling is completed, press operation can be repeated periodically without the
press stopping. When the *NFIN signal goes to 0 after completion of punching, the tool starts moving
to the next punch point
The *NFIN signal goes to 0, and the tool starts moving to the last punch point at the same time the
NBLE signal goes to 1. If the *PE signal goes to 0 after the end of positioning to the last punch point,
the PF signal goes to 0. Accordingly, the press is stopped. In this case, the NBL and NBLE signals go
off at the same time the PF signal goes to 0. After the tool is positioned at the last punch point and the
*NFIN signal goes to 0, the time set in parameter No. 16035 elapses, then processing goes to the next
block. (refer to Fig.3.5.2 (a))
- 32 -
Positioning to the Positioning to the

first punch point last punch point
Work movement by
t2 Next block
the Xaxis and Yaxis
Press start signal t1

t3
PF<Y004.2>
Nibbling finish signal

NBL<Y004.1>
Nibbling completion signal

NBLE<Fn230.7>

*NFIN<X004.6>
Press stop signal

*PE<X004.7>
Completion of punch operation
Press operation
Position of the work Tp Ti

Press start Tt Request for press stop Press stop
Tt the time required for 1cycle press operation t1 Time set in parameter No. 16034
Tp the time required for punch operation t2 Time set in parameter No. 16035
Ti The time permissible for positioning t3 Time set in parameter No. 16039
Fig.3.5.2 (a) Nibbling (continuous press) process
NOTE
1 Let the time required for 1cycle press operation be Tt and the time required for punch
operation be Tp. The time permissible for positioning Ti is found by the following
formula: Ti = Tt Tp. The maximum distance allowable for positioning requiring the time
Ti, namely the maximum nibbling pitch, is determined when the conditions such as
selection of the time Ti, a machine, and a servo motor, or other conditions are satisfied.
2 Since the NBLE signal goes to 1 when the M code for canceling the nibbling mode is
read, nibbling by the M code is performed a little later than the time when the tool starts
moving to the last punch point.
With the machine that sets the *PE signal to 0 after the *NFIN signal goes to 0 in a press cycle, no
punch operation may be performed at the last punch point if the distance for positioning to the last punch
point is shorter than the specified one. This is due to the following reason. Setting the *NFIN signal to
0 starts positioning to the last punch point. However the tool completes positioning before the *PE
signal goes to 0. Then the *PE signal going to 0 sets the PF signal to 0, thus causing the press to
stop. With the machine under this condition, therefore, use bit 7 (NED) of parameter No. 16003 to specify
the following operation. After the end of the last positioning in the nibbling block, the *NFIN signal goes
to 0. Then, the *PE signal going to 0 can set the PF signal to 0. (refer to Fig.3.5.2 (b))
- 33 -
Positioning to the
last punch point
Work movement by
the Xaxis and Yaxis Next block
Press start signal

t3 t3
PF<Y004.2>

NBL<Y004.1>
Nibbling completion signal

NBLE<Fn230.7>

*NFIN<X004.6>
Press stop signal

*PE<X004.7>
Completion of punch operation
Press operation
Position of the work

Press stop (1) Press stop (2)
Request for press stop (1) Request for press stop (2)
(1) In case of bit 7 (NED) of parameter No.16003 is 0
(2) In case of bit 7 (NED) of parameter No.16003 is 1 t3 Time set in parameter No. 16039
Fig.3.5.2 (b) Timing chart for the machine that sets the *PE signal to 0 after the *NFIN signal goes to 0
In the nibbling block when the CPS signal is 1, when the time set in parameter No. 16034 elapses after
positioning to the first punch point ends, the PF signal goes to 1, but the NBL signal does not go to 1.
When the *PFIN signal goes to 0, the tool starts positioning to the next punch point. When the *PE
signal goes to 0, the time set in parameter No. 16030 elapses, then the PF signal goes to 0. When the
tool complete positioning to the next punch point, the time set in parameter No. 16034 elapses, then the
PF signal goes to 1. Thereafter, the operation is repeated until the tool moves to the last punch point.
(refer to Fig.3.5.2 (c))
- 34 -
Positioning to the Positioning to the

first punch point last punch point
Work movement by
t2 t2 t2 t2
the Xaxis and Yaxis Next block
Press start signal

PF<Y004.2> t1 t3 t1 t3 t3 t1 t3
Punch finish signal for

1cycle press
*PFIN<X004.5>
Press stop signal

*PE<X004.7>
Press operation
Position of the work t1 Time set in parameter No.16034

Press stop
When bit 3 (NDF) of parameter No.16181 is set
Completion of punch operation to 1, this time is fixed 0.
t2 Time set in parameter No.16040
Press start Request for press stop
t3 Time set in parameter No.16030
Fig.3.5.2 (c) Timing chart for nibbling in a press cycle
When the CPS signal is set to 0 during nibbling in the state that the CPS is 1, the PF signal goes to
1 at the same time the NBL signal goes to 1. Then the above nibbling continues. When the CPS
signal is set to 1 during nibbling in the state that the CPS signal is 0, the *PE signal going to 0 sets
the PF and NBL signals to 0. Then the above nibbling when the CPS signal is 1 continues.
CAUTION
1 Override signals ROV1 and ROV2 for rapid traverse are effective during
positioning to the first punch point in the nibbling block. After that, the ROV1 and
ROV2 signals areineffective during positioning for the pitch to the last punch
point, and the override rate is fixed to 100%.
2 When the single block signal is set to 1 during nibbling, the machine stops after
consecutive nibbling operations are completed.
3 While the tool moves to the first punch point during nibbling, setting the
automatic operation stop (*SP) signal to 0 stops the automatic operation of the
CNC. At the same time, positioning stops immediately, setting the automatic
operation starting (STL) signal to 0 and the automatic operation stopping (SPL)
signal to 1.
When the *SP signal is set to 0 during pitch movement from the first punch
point to the last punch point, automatic operation of the CNC is stopped
immediately. However, automatic operation of the CNC can also be stopped
after the end of the pitch movement when the *SP signal is set to 0 by the
setting of bit 2 (NSP) of parameter No. 16181. In this case, the PF and NBL
signals are turned off when the *PE signal goes to 0.
- 35 -
Changing a nibblingmode sequence

In conventional nibbling, once press start signal PF is output, it remains set to 1 until nibbling has been
completed, so that press operation is repeated periodically without the press stopping. When the bit 3
(NPF) of parameter No.16181 is set to 1, this function can change this sequence to one using signals
*PFIN and *PE, like that for a 1cycle press. In such a case, signal NBL is not set to 1 and a press
sequence is executed in the same way as that for a 1cycle press.
This function changes only the press sequence. Nibbling command operation is controlled in the same
way as for a conventional system.
Signal
Nibbling signal NBL<Y004.1>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the executing continuous press (Nibbling).
[Output cond] Please refer to above "Overview " for details.
Nibbling finish signal *NFIN<X004.6>

[Function] Informs the PMC that one press operation of the continuous press is completed.
1cycle press select signal CPS<Gn230.2>

[Function] Commands the continuous press works by the sequence similar to 1cycle press.
Nibbling completion signal NBLE<Fn230.7>

[Function] Informs the PMC that the tool starts moving to the last punch point while executing
continuous press.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 *NFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y004 NBL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn230 CPS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn230 NBLE
- 36 -
NOTE
1 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the *NFIN signals are placed in
X004 shown above.
2 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the *NFIN signals are placed in
the X addresses set by parameter No. 16045. (The bit positions do not change.)
used.
5 When bit 3 (YSG) of parameter No. 16000 is 0, the NBL signals are placed in
Y004 shown above.
6 When bit 3 (YSG) of parameter No. 16000 is 1, the NBL signals are placed in the
WARNING
If the address assigned as signal NBL, or *NFIN is used by another usage, it may
cause an unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must
prevent the competition of the used address.
3.5.3 Manual Press

Overview
Setting the MPS signal to 1 can set the press start (PF) signal to 1. The signal is used when a 1cycle
press operation is performed with the push button on the machine operators panel.
During manual press operation, the control of the PF signal depends on the status of the MNS signal.
When the MPS signal changes from 0 to 1 in the state that the MNS signal is 0, the PF signal goes
to 1. When the time set in parameter No. 16030 elapses after the *PE signal goes to 0, the PF signal
goes to 0. (refer to Fig.3.5.3 (a))
When the MPS signal changes from 0 to 1 in the state that the MNS signal is 1, the PF signal goes
to 1. The state of the PF signal is held until the MPS signal goes to 0. When the MPS signal changes
from 1 to 0, the PF signal goes to 0. (refer to Fig.3.5.3 (b))
Manual press start

signal
MPS<Gn230.3>
Press start signal

PF<Y004.2>
Press stop signal

*PE<X004.7>
Time set in parameter No. 16030
Fig.3.5.3 (a) In case of continuous manual press signal MNS is 0
- 37 -
Manual press start

signal
MPS<Gn230.3>
Press start siganal

PF<Y004.2>
Fig.3.5.3 (b) In case of continuous manual press signal MNS is 1
Signal
Manual press start signal MPS<Gn230.3>
[Function] Commands the CNC to start the manual press.
Continuous manual press signal MNS<Gn230.4>

[Function] Commands the CNC to execute the manual press with tehcontinuous press.
[Operation] Please refer to above "Overview" for details.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn230 MNS MPS
3.5.4 Press Start Lock Signal (Input)

Overview
When the PFL signal is 1, the PF signal does not go to 1, but can be locked in the block for 1cycle
press. The tool completes positioning in the state that the PFL signal is 1 and the time set in parameter
No. 16031 elapses, then the next block is executed. (refer to Fig.3.5.4 (a))
Axis positioning Next block

Axis movement
Press Start Lock Signal

PFL<Gn230.0>
Fig.3.5.4 (a) 1cycle press operation when Press start lock signal PFL = 1
In the same way, the PF signal and the nibbling (NBL) signal do not go to 1 in the block for nibbling
when the PFL signal is 1. When the tool completes positioning to the first punch point, the timer set in
parameter No. 16034 starts. If the PFL signal is 1 in this case, the time set in parameter No. 16031
elapses, then the tool starts positioning to the next punch point. If the PFL signal remains 1, the tool
completes positioning for each pitch, then the previously described processing is repeated. (refer to
Fig.3.5.4 (b))
- 38 -

Axis movement
T1 T2

PFL<Gn230.0>
T1Time set in parameter No. 16034
T2Time set in parameter No. 16031
Fig.3.5.4 (b) Nibbling when Press start lock signal PFL = 1
When the PFL changes from 1 to 0, the tool completes positioning for the pitch, the time set in parameter
No. 16034 elapses, then the PF and NBL signals go to 1. When the PFL changes from 0 to 1, the
tool completes positioning for the pitch, the press stop (*PE) signal goes to 0, then the PF and NBL
signals go to 0. These operations are the same as those when nibbling starts and ends. (refer to
Subsection 3.5.2)
NOTE
The PFL signal is effective for manual press operation.
Signal
Press start lock signal PFL<Gn230.0>
[Function] Locks in the block for 1cycle press.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn230 PFL
3.5.5 Press Start Assistance Signal

Overview
When the press start lock (PFL) signal is 1 during tape or memory operation, DPF signal is set to 1,
not the press start (PF) signal. To lock the press start operation due to some reason related to the machine,
the automatic operation of the CNC can be stopped according to the supervision of the DPF signal if
necessary, or the CNC can be made to enter the alarm state with the external data input function. The DPF
signal goes to 0 after the time set in parameter No. 16031 elapses, then the next block is executed.
- 39 -

Axis movement
Press Start Assistance

Signal DPF<Fn230.6>

PFL<Gn230.0>
Fig.3.5.5 Press Start Assistance Signal DPF
Signal
Press start assistance signal DPF<Fn230.6>
[Function] This signal is set to 1, not the PF signal.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn230 DPF
3.5.6 Press Start Waiting Signal (Input) and Press Start Waiting
Signal B
Overview
When the press start lock (PFL) signal is 0 in the block for punching, setting the PFW signal to 1
inhibits the press start (PF) signal from going to 1. The PFW signal can be used when an attempt is
made to apply an interlock to the press start operation according to the mechanical conditions. However,
the PFW signal is ineffective if the PF signal already goes to 1.
Both the PFWB signal and the PFW are provided. The PFWB signal is read directly from the machine by
the CNC, not via the PMC. The use of the PFWB is the same as that of the PFW signal. The PFWB signal
is made effective by bit 5 (PWB) of parameter No. 16002.
NOTE
Signals PFW and PFWB are ineffective for continuous manual pressing.
Signal
Press start waiting signal PFW<Gn230.1>
[Function] Makes the press start wait.
Press start waiting signal B PFWB<X004.4>

[Function] Makes the press start wait.
- 40 -
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 PFWB
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn230 PFW
NOTE
1 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the PFWB signals are placed in
X004 shown above.
2 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PFWB signals are placed in
used.
WARNING
If the address assigned as signal PFWB is used by another usage, it may cause
an unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must prevent the
competition of the used address.
3.5.7 Press Start Signal B (Output)

Overview
The press start (PF) signal goes to 1 and the time set in parameter No. 16037 elapses, then the PFB
signal goes to 1. The press stop (*PE) signal goes to 0 and the time set in parameter No. 16030
elapses, then the PFB signal goes to 0. After that, the time set in parameter No. 16037 or No. 16038
elapses, then the PF signal goes to 0.
The PFB signal is used, for example, for the following. The PF signal controls on and off of the brake for
the press while the PFB signal controls on and off of the clutch for the press.
Press start signal

PF<Y004.2>

Press Start Signal B
PFB<Y004.3>

Press stop signal or parameter No. 16038
*PE<X004.7>
Time set in parameter No.16030
Fig.3.5.7 Press Start Signal B
- 41 -
CAUTION
1 When the PFB signal is not used, always set parameters 16037 and 16038 to 0.
2 When the setting in bit 6 (PF9) of parameter No. 16002 is 1, the time set in
parameter No. 16038 is used as the time required for the process from setting
the PFB to 0 to setting the PF signal to 0.
Signal
Press start signal B PFB<Y004.3>
[Function] In a punching block, this signal notifies the state of press start after the times specified
passes.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y004 PFB
NOTE
1 When bit 3 (YSG) of parameter No. 16000 is 0, the PFB signals are placed in
Y004 shown above.
2 When bit 3 (YSG) of parameter No. 16000 is 1, the PFB signals are placed in the
WARNING
If the address assigned as signal PFB is used by another usage, it may cause an
unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must prevent the
3.5.8 Press Stop Signal Neglect

Overview
When the setting in bit 6 (DPE) of parameter No. 16003 is 1, the EPE signal enables switching of the
press stop (*PE) signal between effective and ineffective states. When the EPE signal is 0, the *PE
signal is ignored. When the EPE signal is 1, the *PE signal is made effective.
CAUTION
The EPE signal is ineffective for manual press operation.
Signal
Press stop signal neglect EPE<Gn230.5>
[Function] Negrects the *PE signal.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn230 EPE
- 42 -
3.5.9 Twostep Selection (Input) SNP for Nibbling

Overview
If the machine can change the rotation of the flywheel, it can perform nibbling at high and low speeds.
The maximum pitch movable with the nibbling command is limited and set in parameter. The SNP signal
is used to switch between the maximum moving pitches for highspeed nibbling and lowspeed nibbling.
The signal can also be used to change the maximum moving pitches according to the thickness of a board
blank to be machined.
When the SNP signal is 0, the machine uses the maximum movement pitch set in parameters No. 16186
to No. 16189.
When the SNP signal is 1, themachine uses the maximum movement pitch set in parameter No. 16190
to No. 16193.
NOTE
1 Even when the SNP signal is not used, the maximum movement pitch can be
selected by nibbling with the M code set in parameter No. 16185.
2 Nibbling with the M code set in parameter No. 16185 and nibbling with the SNP
are effective when setting in bit 1 (NPC) of parameter No. 16181 is 1.
Siganal
Twostep selection signal for nibbling SNP<Gn230.6>
[Function] Switches the maximum moving pitches for Nibbling.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn230 SNP
3.5.10 Press Start Auxiliary Signal B

Overview
Once positioning has been completed as part of automatic operation, this signal is output in a punching
block in which press start signal PF is output. This signal is also output when press start wait signals PFW
and PFWB are set to 1. The signal is not output in manual press mode.
Signal
Press start auxiliary signal B DSPF<Fn230.5>
[Function] This signal is output in a punching block.
[output cond.] Please refer to above "Overview " for details.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn230 DSPF
- 43 -
3.5.11 Forming Mode Selection Signal

Overview
Forming mode is selected while forming Mode Selection Signal FORMS is set to 1.
The selection of forming mode is controlled based on the OR of this signal and the forming mode
command, specified using an M code.
CAUTION
1 Change the state of this signal only while the CNC is placed in the operation stop
status.
2 Once the state of this signal has been changed, at least 16 ms must elapse
before the subsequent operation can be performed.
Signal
Forming mode selection signal FORMS<Gn240.0>
[Function] Notifies the CNC of the selection of forming mode.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn240 FORMS
3.6 EXTERNAL OPERATION FUNCTION
Overview
When a tape or memory command input is selected, press start signal PF is turned to 1 after positioning
in a block to be punched. However, if signal EFS is 1, signal PF is not turned to 1, but signal EF is
turned to 1.
Perform tapping and other operation by this signal on the machine side. Turn signal FIN to 1 to turn
signal EF to 0, and resultantly turn signal FIN to 0 when the operation has finished completely. The
control proceeds to the next block after signal FIN has been turned to 0.
If signal PF is preset to be turned to 1 (parameter (No. 16012)) before completion of positioning, signal
EF is also turned to 1 before completion of positioning. Accordingly, signal EF should be gated with
distribution end signal DEN. Since signal EF is turned to 1 unconditionally, if signal EFS is 1 in a
block to be punched, if no motion is desirable by the receipt of this signal on the machine side, treat
signal EF as required, and turn FIN to 1 at the above timing. If signal EFS is 0 and press lock signal
PFL is 1 in the block to be punched neither signal EF nor PF is turned to 1, and the control proceeds
to the next block after time No. 16031 has passed. Signal EFS is ineffective in blocks with nibbling
(Nibbling by G68, G69 and M code).
- 44 -
Positioning Next block

Axial motion
External operation
function signal
EF<Fn008.0>
Distribution end signal

DEN< Fn001.3>
External operation
End signal
FIN< Gn004.3>
Fig.3.6 Timing chart for external operation signal
Signal
External operation function signal EF<Fn008.0>
[Function] This signal is set to 1, not the PF signal.
External operation function select signal EFS<Gn230.7>

[Function] This signal enables the external operation function.
End signal FIN<Gn004.3>

[Function] When the external operation function is enabled, this signal becomes effective as the
completion signal with the EF signal.
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn004 FIN
Gn230 EFS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn008 EF
- 45 -
4.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING B-64623EN/01
4 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

Chapter 4, FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING, consists of the following sections:
4.1 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) ...........................................................................................46

4.2 MULTIPIECE MACHINING FUNCTION......................................................................................50
4.3 YAXIS CRACK CANCEL...............................................................................................................54
4.1 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75)

Overview
By changing the hold position of a workpiece by the workpiece holders, a workpiece having a size larger
than the stroke in Xaxis direction of the machine can be machined.
If it is desired to punch a workpiece at the workpiece holder position when the workpiece was set to the
machine, the hold position of the workpiece must be changed.
Y Workpiece
Workpiece holder
Fig.4.1 (a) Workpiece holder
Repositioning of a workpiece is generally done according to the following procedure, assuming that the
workpiece is positioned at a location where the repositioning of the workpiece is executable.
(1) The claw of the workpiece holder is opened, and also the clamper depresses the workpiece
concurrently to fix the workpiece as a general procedure, so that the workpiece is not deviated from
the table.
Clamper
Y
Workpiece Workpiece holder
Fig.4.1 (b) Workpiece clamp
- 46 -
B-64623EN/01 4.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING
(2) The workpiece holder moves in the Yaxis direction and separates from the workpiece.
Clamper
Y
Fig.4.1 (c) Retreat of workpiece holder
(3) The workpiece holder moves in the Xaxis direction to relocate the hold position.
Y Workpiece
Workpiece holder
Fig.4.1 (d) Movement of workpiece holder
(4) The workpiece holder moves in the Yaxis direction to return to the position where it can hold the
workpiece.
clamper
Y
Fig.4.1 (e) Advancement of workpiece holder
- 47 -
(5) The claw of the workpiece holder is closed to hold the workpiece, and the clamper lifts and separates
from the workpiece concurrently.
Clamper
Y
Fig.4.1 (f) Workpiece unclamp
A series of the above operation can be done by oneblock command including G function.
G75 X x
The above command is executed by being divided into the following 5 blocks.
M10; : M code for clamping a workpiece (Set in prameter No.16207)
G70G91Y yp ; : Clearance yp (Set in prameter No.16209)
G70G91Xx ; : Repositioning value : x (Instruction value x in G75 instructing)
G70G91Yyp ; : Amount of return yp (Set in prameter No.16209 or parameter No.16211)
M11; : M code for releasing the workpiece (Set in prameter No.16208)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16050 PCF
NOTE

#1 PCF The Xaxis or Yaxis movement mode is selected for the following blocks:
(1) Movement to each punch point with the pattern function (G26, G76, G77, G78, etc.)
(2) Operation in automatic repositioning (G75)
(3) Movement to the first punch point with the nibbling function (G68, G69, and
Mcode)
0: Rapid traverse is executed.
1: For G00, rapid traverse is executed. For G01, G02, or G03, linear interpolation
cutting feed is executed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16201 APR

- 48 -
#4 APR Upon reset, the compensation value of the reference point in the workpiece coordinate
systemt in the cause of repositioning
0: Not cleared.
1: Added to the workpiece coordinate system and cleared.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16204 BKR

#2 BKR The first automatic repositioning command (G75) that sets automatic operation signal OP
from 0 to 1 uses:
0: The values set in parameter No. 16209 as the clearance and amount of return for the
Yaxis.
(The clearance and amount of return are identical values.)
1: The values set in No. 16209 as the clearance for the Yaxis, and the values set in
parameter No. 16211 as the amount of return.
(The clearance and amount of return are different values.)
16207 M code for clamping a workpiece
16208 M code for releasing the workpiece
[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] 2-word path
Parameter No. 16207 sets the M code for clamping a workpiece. Parameter 16208 sets the
M code for releasing the workpiece.
In blocks between the M code for clampling a workpiece and the M code for releasing the
workpiece, the distances traveled along the Xaxis and Yaxis are not take into account
in the workpiece coordinate system. The PF signal to start pressing is not set to 1.
16209 Clearance and amount of return for the Y axis in automatic repositioning

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
Each of the parameters sets the clearance and amount of return for the Yaxis in
automatic repositioning (G75).
16211 Amount of return for the Y axis in automatic repositioning

[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Valid data range] Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data
These parameters specify the amount of return for the Yaxis in automatic repositioning
(G75).
- 49 -
The clearance is specified in conventional parameter No. 16209.
NOTE
These parameters are valid when bit 2 (BKR) of parameter No.
16204 is set to 1.
4.2 MULTIPIECE MACHINING FUNCTION

Overview
The multipiece machining function enables several sheets of product with the same punching shape to be
produced from a single sheet of material at a time by simple commands.
This function allows so called trial machining that performs punching only on a sheet of product from
the machining program for multipiece machining by a simple setup method, therefore the machining
program can be easily checked before full machining.
4.2.1 Base Point Command of Multipiece Machining (G98)

Overview
Cutting margin
(3) (4) (9)
Workpiece
(2) (5) (8)
(1) (6) (7)
Y
Base point of multipiece machining
Catching margin
X
Fig.4.2.1 (a) Multi-Piece machining function
Parts (2) to (9) as shown above have the same punching shape as part (1).
Machining commands to punch on a sheet of material must be specified on the product part at the lower
left (1).
The point at the lower left of the set of multiproducts (point B shown in Fig.4.2.1 (a); called as Base
point of multipiece machining hereafter) must be specified prior to the machining commands to punch
on a product part by G98 as absolute coordinates under the system of coordinates specified using G92
command. In the G98 command, the Xaxial and Yaxial lengths of one product and the numbers of
products in the directions of Xaxis and Yaxis must be specified.
- 50 -
G98Xxb Yyb Ilx Jly Pnx Kny;

xb : Xaxis coordinate value of the base point of multipiece machining
yb : Yaxis coordinate value of the base point of multipiece machining
lx : X axial length of one product part (a positive number)
ly : Y axial length of one product part (a positive number)
nx : The number of products in the X axial direction (Note) (Command range is 0 to 9999)
ny : The number of products in the Y axial direction (Note) (Command range is 0 to 9999)
NOTE
Part (1) in Fig.4.2.1 (b) is not counted among the number of products in the each axial direction.
Machining commands to punch on a sheet of material must be specified on the product part at the lower
left (part (1) in Fig.4.2.1 (b)).
The number of products in the Y axial direction (ny=2)
Y axial length of one

product part (ly)
(1)
The number of products in the

X axial direction (nx=3)
X axial length of one
product part (lx)
Y
the base point of multipiece
machining (xb,yb)
X
Fig.4.2.1 (b) Number of Products of Multi-piece Machining
4.2.2 MultiPiece Machining Commands (G73, G74)
Overview
Specify any of the following commands, and then multipiece machining is performed by calling machining
commands stored using the U/V/W macro function.
G73W n Q q or
G74W n Q q
n A macro number
q Machining start area specification
q = 1 Machining starts from the lower left area ( (1) in Fig.4.2.1 (a))
q = 2 Machining starts from the lower right area ( (7) in Fig.4.2.1 (a))
q = 3 Machining starts from the upper left area ( (3) in Fig.4.2.1 (a))
q = 4 Machining starts from the upper right area ( (9) in Fig.4.2.1 (a))
- 51 -
G73(G74) Wwn Qq ;
wn : A macro number
q: Machining start area specification
G73 goes on punching in the X axial direction, whereas G74 goes onpunching in the Y axial direction in
grid partsline.
4.2.3 Setting of Machining Method for MultiPiece Machining

Overview
When products are machined using a NC program for multipiece machining, any desired machining
method can be selected according to a setup from MDI.
Input a setting value into the setting data number 16206 in MDI mode according to the desired machining
method.
Setting value for No. 16206

0: The NC program for multipiece machining is not used
1: Trial punching for multipiece machining
2: Machining on the reset of material punched for trial
3: Full machining on a material for multipiece machining
If trial punching is selected, only the lowerleft product part of material ( (1) in Fig.4.2.1 (a)). As a result,
macros except 60 to 89 are executed while storing, and blocks specified in G73/G74 are all ignored.
Machining on the reset of material punched for trial signifies that after punching on only the lowerleft
product part of material, the remaining product parts of material are machined entirely. For this purpose,
no machining is performed during the storage of macros, and the machining on the lowerleft product
part is skipped when commands of G73/G74 are executed.
For full machining on a material, no machining is performed during the storage of macros, but machining
over the entire product parts is performed by G73/G74.
Set to 0 if NC program for the multipiece machining is not used.
4.2.4 Signal
Multipiece machining setting signal MLP1, MLP2<Gn231.0,.1>
[Function] These signals can set the method used for machining multiple workpieces.
[Operation] The table below gives the relation between the status of signals and method used to
machine multiple workpieces
These signals are effective when bit 3 (MLP) of parameter No. 16201 is set to 1.
Generally, the signals must be changed while the CNC is in the reset state.
MLP1 MLP2 Method used to machine multiple workpieces

0 0 A program without the G73 or G74 command for machining when multiple
workpieces are taken is used.
1 0 A program containing the G73 or G74 command is used and test machining is
executed.
0 1 A program containing the G73 or G74 command is used and the remaining
processing is executed after test machining.
1 1 A program containing the G73 or G74 command is used and the entire
machining is executed.
- 52 -
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn231 MLP2 MLP1
4.2.5 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16201 MLP MPC

#2 MPC When the number of machined workpieces is counted in multipleworkpiece machining:

0: The number of actually machined workpieces is counted.
1: The number is incremented by one when complete machining or remainder
machining is executed (but not when trial machining is executed).
#3 MLP Setting for taking multiple workpieces depends on:

0: The set parameter (No. 16206).
1: A signal (MLP1 or MLP2) input from the PMC machine.
16206 Machining pattern when multiple workpieces are taken

[Data type] Byte path
Parameter No. 16206 sets a machining pattern when multiple workpieces are taken
Settable value Machining process when multiple workpieces are taken

0 A program without the G73 or G74 command for machining when multiple
workpieces are taken is used.
1 A program containing the G73 or G74 command is used and test machining is
executed.
2 A program containing the G73 or G74 command is used and the remaining
processing is executed after test machining.
3 A program containing the G73 or G74 command is used and the entire
machining is executed.
NOTE
1 When bit 3 (MLP) of parameter No.16201 is set to 0, parameter No.
16206 is validated.
2 When parameter No. 16206 is set to 0, alarm 4539 is issued if the
G73 or G74 command is found.
4.2.6 Alarm and Message

No. Message Description
PS4531 U/V MACRO FORMAT ERROR An attempt was made to store a macro while storing another
macro using a U or V macro.
A V macro was specified although the processing to store a
macro was not in progress.
A U macro number and V macro number do not correspond
with each other.
- 53 -

PS4532 INPROPER U/V MACRO NUMBER The number of an inhibited macro was specified in a U or V
macro command.
PS4533 U/V MACRO MEMORY OVERFLOW An attempt was made to store too many macros with a U or
V macro command.
PS4534 W MACRO NUMBER NOT FOUND Macro number W specified in a U or V macro command is
not stored.
PS4536 NO W,Q COMMAND IN MULTI-PIECE W or Q was not specified in the command for taking multiple
workpieces.
PS4537 ILLEGAL Q VALUE IN MULTI-PIECE In the command for taking multiple workpieces, Q is set to a
value beyond the range from 1 to 4.
PS4538 W NO. NOT FOUND IN MULTI-PIECE Macro number W specified in the command for taking
multiple workpieces is not stored.
PS4539 MULTI-PIECE SETTING IS ZERO The command for taking multiple workpieces was specified
although zero is specified for the function to take multiple
workpieces (No. 15649 or signals MLP1 and MLP2 (PMC
address Gn231.0 and .1)).
PS4540 MULTI-PIECE COMMAND WITHIN The command for taking multiple workpieces was specified
MACRO when a U or V macro was being stored.
PS4542 MULTI-PIECE COMMAND ERROR Although G77 P0 was specified, the G75 command was
issued.
Although G77 K0 was specified, the G76 command was
issued.
PS4543 MULTI-PIECE Q COMMAND ERROR Although G77 P0 was specified, the Q value for the G76
command was not 1 or 3.
Although G77 P0 was specified, the Q value for the G75
command was not 1 or 2.
PS4544 MULTI-PIECE P/R COMMAND In the command for resuming taking multiple workpieces, the
ERROR resume position (P) is set to a value beyond the range from 1
to total number of workpieces to be machined.
4.2.7 Reference Item

OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64624EN) MULTIPIECE MACHINING FUNCTION
4.3 YAXIS CRACK CANCEL

Overview
The Y-axis crack cancel Mcodes which is set by parameters (Nos. 16610 to 16614) are commanded, the
crack between work coordinate system and machine coordinate system of Yaxis repositioning motion is
canceled.
Example 1) Y1525M30 ;
Yaxis moves including the crack of repositioning.
Example 2) Y1525 ;
M30 ;
The work coordinate system is preset to the machine coordinate systemto cancel the crack
of repositioning by M30. (Yaxis does not move.)
Limitations
The Y-axis crack cancel Mcode must be different from another special meaning Mcode.
But M02 and M30 is possible.
- 54 -
Parameter
16610 M code 1 for cancelling the Yaxis crack

Set an M code for Y-axis crack cancel.

The cancel Mcode must be specified in these parameters by different from Mcode used
for another function. But M02 and M30 are possible.
- 55 -
5.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) B-64623EN/01
5 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)

Chapter 5, TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION), consists of the following sections:
5.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION ......................................................................................................56

5.2 TOOL OFFSET...................................................................................................................................57
5.3 TURRET AXIS CONTROL (T AXIS CONTROL) ...........................................................................58
5.4 MULTIPLETOOL CONTROL.........................................................................................................69
5.5 TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION ...............................................................................................76
5.6 UNREGISTERED T CODE SIGNAL................................................................................................82
5.7 MANUAL TOOL CHANGE ..............................................................................................................83
5.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION

Overview
By specifying an up to 8digit numerical value following address T, tools can be selected on the machine.
One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine tool builders manual for the number of
digits commandable with address T and the correspondence between the T codes and machine operations.
When a move command and a T code are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one
of the following two ways:
(i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and T function commands.
(ii) Executing T function commands upon completion of move command execution.
The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the machine tool builders specifications. Refer to the
manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the machine tool builders specifications. Refer to the manual
issued by the machine tool builder for details.
The T command must be given without fail to the block before a block where punching is first made by
press motion in one program or to the same block where punching is first made by press motion.
If the T command is not given to these blocks, the press start signal which instructs Punch by press
motion, is not sent to the machine, and machining does not proceed to the next block.
Example
O1000 G92
N1 G00 G90 X Y

Punching should be made in N1 block.
However, since no T command is given to a block before N1 block or N1 block, no punching is
made, and machining does not proceed to the next block.
- 56 -
B-64623EN/01 5.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)
CAUTION
1 The correspondence between commandable T codes and tools depends upon
machine tool builders.
The commandable T codes are set in tool registering screen before shipment
from factory. If a commanded T code was not registered, alarm (PS 4602) is
produced.
2 No T code is commandable in the following blocks.
(i) G10 (Programmable data input)
(ii) G22 (Stored stroke limit function on)
(iii) G23 (Stored stroke limit function off)
(iv) G92 (Coordinate system setting)
(v) G52 (Local coordinate system setting)
(vi) G53 (machine coordinate system select command)
(vi) G72 (Standard point command)
(vii) G75 (Automatic repositioning)
(viii) G98 (Base point command for multi-piece machining)
(ix) G73, G74 (Multi-piece machining command)
3 If tape or memory operation is made in the T command neglect status, the T
command is ignored, and the operation is made as if the T command were not
given.
The press start signal is not sent to the machine side in a block to be punched,
and processing does not proceed to the next block. If a program is checked by
marking to a workpiece by using a marking tool, for example, select the marking
punch tool by a T command in the MDI mode in advance, and perform the tape
or memory operation without reset operation in the T command neglect status.
Now, punching is made using the tool selected in the MDI mode.
4 If automatic operation is applied to the machine side by the cycle start when the
cycle start lamp signal is not sent, i.e., in the reset status, the cycle start lamp
signal is sent.
If a block to be punched appears before a T command is given after this cycle
start lamp signal has been sent, the press start signal is not sent to the machine
side, and also machining does not proceed to the next block.
The cycle start lamp signal is stopped by reset operation.
5 The press start signal can be sent by setting bit 5 (TCF) of parameter No. 16003
even if no T command is given to a block before the block where the punching is
made or the block in which punching is made. In this case, the integrated value
of the number of punch times may differ from actual number of punch times
about respective tools.
5.2 TOOL OFFSET

Overview
Tool offset is applicable to respective T codes in the Xaxis and Yaxis directions.
Since use of this tool offset function depends upon machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool
builders manual.
- 57 -
CAUTION
1 Tool offset compensation applies to tools numbered from 1 to 9999.
2 Tool offset values are set in the tool registering screen in the unit of the least
command increment for each X axis and Y axis before shipment of the machine
from the machine toolbuilders factory.
3 If data are inputted by inch in a millimeter system machine, or if data are inputted
by millimeter in an inch system machine, a tool offset error is produced within the
sum of a half of the least input increment and half of the least command
increment. This error is not accumulated.
5.3 TURRET AXIS CONTROL (T AXIS CONTROL)

Overview
The tool positions corresponding to respective tool numbers on the turret axis are set in the tool registered
screen in the unit of least command increment. By commanding one of T0 to T9999 during automatic
operation (memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI operation), the control unit calculates the moving
quantity of the turret axis from the position of a tool corresponding to this T code on the turret axis and
the present turret axis position. The turret axis is positioned in such a direction that the absolute value of
the moving quantity is less than 180 degrees. If the absolute value of the moving quantity is 180 degrees,
the turret axis is positioned in the plus (+) direction. (Whether the plus direction means the clockwise
direction or not depends upon machine tools).
Simultaneously when the positioning motion of the turret axis is started, the commanded decimal 4digit
numeral is sent by the binary code relay contact. The T code read command signal TF to give the code
readout timing on the machine side is turned to 1 when the time (TMF) preset by a parameter (No.
3010) has passed after T code signal was sent. Read the T code signal and perform corresponding motion
after reading signal TF on the machine side.
After completion of corresponding motion, turn signal FIN to 1. Turning signal FIN to 1 causes
signal TF to be turned to 0. Turn signal FIN to 0 after signal TF has been turned to 0. Since signal
transfer is just the same as in miscellaneous function (M function), the T code signal remains held until a
new T code is commanded next.
If the turret axis has already been positioned when signal FIN goes to 0, the control proceeds to the next
block. If the turret axis has not being positioned yet, the control proceeds to the next block after the turret
axis has been positioned.
If an M code is commanded concurrently in a block to which a T code is previously commanded, signal
FIN should be turned to 1 after all motions have been completed. When a workpiece is punched by press
motion using a selected tool, a considerable load is applied to the turret.Accordingly, the turret is
mechanically clamped by using shot pins or the like, in general. Since the mechanical clamping force of
shot pins, etc. is stronger than the clamping force of the servo motor, the turret axis is usually set to the
servooff condition.
In such a case, the servooff condition should be released to the servoon condition to remove
mechanical clamp of shot pins, etc. before starting the motion of the turret axis. The following description
shows an example of processing to be made on the machine side in such a case. Assume that interlock
signal *ITT of the turret axis is 0 (interlock condition) and serveoff signal of the turret axis SVFT is
1 (servooff condition) when the turret is being mechanically clamped by using shot pins or the like.
When T0 to T9999 are commanded by automatic operation (memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI
operation), the control unit calculates the moving quantity of the turret axis as described previously.
The moving quantity of the turret axis is 0, if T01 is commanded when tool number 01 is being selected,
for example. Lets consider such a case that the moving quantity of the turret is not 0, i.e., the turret axis
is positioned. The positioning of the turret is going to start soon after the T code was sent. However, the
axial motion is not commanded because signal *ITT is 0, and the turret axis remains stopped in
practice.
- 58 -
On the other hand, axis moving signal MVT is set to 1, even if signal *ITT is 0. Accordingly,
whether the positioning of the turret axis is executed or not can be known by signal MVT on the machine
side.
The above description may be summarized as follows. Signal MVT goes to 1 simultaneously when the
T code is sent, and signal TF goes to 1 after the time TMF has passed. Read the T signal, and perform
corresponding motion on the machine side when signal TF is 1. If signal MVT is 1 when signal TF is
1, release the turret axis from being mechanically clamped by shot pins or the like, and turn signal
SVFT to 0 after confirming that the turret axis has been unclamped mechanically (Mount a timer on the
machine side, if required). A current flows to the servo motor to excite it.
If the servo motor shaft was rotated by punch motion, etc., while signal SVFT is 1, the servo motor is
going to be reset to the position where signal SVFT is 1 when signal SVFT is set to 0. After turning
signal SVFT to 0, wait for a while on the machine side, and then, turn signal *ITT to 1 to start the
motion of the turret axis. When the motion ends, signal MVT is turned to 0. Mechanically clamp the
turret by means of shot pins or the like. However, since the turret axis is not always stopping
mechanically due to the delay of servo motor, etc., when signal MVT goes to 0, clamp the turret
mechanically by means of shot pins after signal MVT has been turned to 0, and turret axis inposition
signal INPT has been turned to 1. In other words, turn signal *ITT to 0 and signal SVFT to 1 under
the above condition. When signal SVFT is turned to 1, a current cannot be fed to the servo motor,
causing the servo motor to be deenergized. Mechanically clamp the turret by using shot pins or the like on
the machine side after the timer has reached the timeout point, if required. Turn signal FIN to 1 after
the mechanical clamp and the motion for the T code have been completed on the machine side. When
signal FIN is turned to 1, signal TF goes to 0. Then, when signal FIN is turned to 0, the control
proceeds to the next process for example, press start signal PF is turned to 1 if a punch operation is to
be performed in a block with a Tcode command.
The above description covers an example only. If the mechanical clamp fails due to a certain cause, for
example, its decision and processing should be made on the machine side. If the moving quantity of the
turret axis is 0, the turret axis is not positioned, and it is not necessary to release its mechanical clamp,
unlike in turret axis positioning.
In other words, if signal MVT is 0 when signal TF is 1, perform corresponding motion only
according to the T code signal without releasing mechanical clamp.
CAUTION
1 When T axis control is valid, the T axis shoult be set as a rotation axis. (bit 0
(ROTx)) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1)
2 Setting the following parameters of T axis allows the CNC to be compatible with
FANUC Series 0i-PC, as follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 In the absolute programming, the axis rotates in the
direction in which the distance to the target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the amount of the
shift per one rotation
3 Up to 136 T codes can be specified (standard system).
4 If the Taxis is absent, the Tcode signal transfer only is done. Whether the
Taxis is provided or not can be set by bit 4 (TCL) of parameter No. 16260.
5 Up to four digits of the T command are effective for control of the Taxis.
6 Up to eight digits of the T command are effective when the option for the tool data
setting function is used.
7 When T axis control is valid, Backlash Compensation follow parameter setting.
8 For T command blocks, nonlinear interpolation positioning is performed, even
if linear interpolation positioning is specified.
- 59 -
An example of a time chart for above description is shown below.
Execution of the block

Execution of the block by a T command
Tool function code signals

T00 to 31<Fn026 to Fn029>
Tool function strobe signal

TF<Fn007.3>
Axis moving signals
MV<Fn102>
In-position signals
INP<Fn104>
Interlock signal for each axis

*IT<Gn130>
Servo off signals

SVF<Gn126>
Mechanical clamp
complete
Mechanical clamp using
Mechanical clamp remov e
shot pins or the like
Operation
complete
Operation on m achine
side reacting to T code Operation start
Axis movement
Mov ement of serv o motor
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
Fig.5.3 (a) Timing chart
If a feed axis & direction select signal + T of the turret axis is turned to 1 with jog feed selected, the
turret axis moves in the + direction, and if T is turned to 1, the turret axis moves in the direction to
select a tool, respectively.
In other words, when the feed axis & direction select signal is turned to 0, the turret axis moves to
select the nearest tool in the decelerable/stoppable direction, and then stops. However, this motion is
performed only after completion of manual reference position return of the turret axis after power on. In
the period after the power is turned on or after the servo ready signal is set to 0 in case of emergency
stop and before manual reference position return of the turret axis is completed and the machine position
is determined, setting the feed axis direction select signal to 0 decelerates the turret axis movement and
stops it immediately. It is requested, as described above, to move the turret axis after confirming that the
turret has been released from being mechanically clamped with shot pins or the like in the jog feed mode
as well as in the Tcode command mode, if the turret is mechanically clamped by using shot pins, etc.
An example of the manual reference point return of the turret axis will be shown as a time chart below.
When the manual reference point return of the turret axis is completed, the tool number preset to ZERO
POINT in the initial tool registering screen is automatically selected. If it is desired to perform
mechanical motion in correspondence with the selected tool when the manual reference point return has
been completed, make sure that the feed axis & direction select signal has been turned to 1, or zero
- 60 -
point return signal ZPT of the turret axis has been turned to 1 before starting such a work on the
machine side.
Manual reference position

return mode
Feed axis direction select signals

+J,-J<Gn100,102>
Moving signals
MV<Fn102>
In-position signals
INP<Fn104>

*IT<Gn130>
Servo off signal

SVF<Gn126>
Mechanical clamp using shot

Mechanical clamp
pins or the like complete
Axis movement
Deceleration signals for reference

position return *DEC<X009>
Grid
Completion signals for reference

position returnZP<Fn094>
Fig.5.3 (b) Timing chart
Parameter
Refer to parameters No.16260 to No. 16270 in the parameter manual (B64630EN).
Reference item
OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64624EN) Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screens
5.3.1 T Command Neglect Signal

Overview
If T command neglect signal TNG<Gn233.5> is 1 when a T code is commanded by automatic
operation (memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI operation), the commanded T code is ignored.
When a block information is read and a T code is included in the block, the control unit calculates the
moving quantity of the turret axis from the position of a tool corresponding to the commanded T code on
the turret axis and the present turret axis position.
The signal TNG condition at this time is effective. When signal TNG is 1 at this time, the commanded
T code is ignored, the moving quantity of the turret axis is not calculated signal TF is not turned to 1
after the executing block motion has been completed, and also the turret axis is not positioned. Be careful
with the difference from auxiliary function lock signal AFL and press lock signal PFL.
- 61 -
N1 ; N2 T ; N3 T ;
Read of a block and
calculation
T Command Neglect
Signal
TNG<Gn233.5>
Execution of block
N1 ; N2 T ; N3 T ;
T function is T function is not
executed. executed.
Fig.5.3.1 T Command Neglect Signal TNG<Gn233.5>
Signal
T command neglect signal TNG<Gn233.5>
[Function] The commanded T code is ignored.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn233 TNG
5.3.2 Tool Change Signal

Overview
When the T code is instructed by automatic operation (memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI
operation), the turret axis positioning operation can be made to allow the tool corresponding to the the
instructed T code to be selected. The position where the selected tool is punched by press operation and
that where tools are replaced may differ depending on the machine. In this case, the tool to be replaced
can be shifted to the replacement position in the manual mode. In addition, the tool to be replaced can be
readily positioned to the replacement position by the following approach. Namely, the tool is positioned
to the tool replacement position corresponding to the instructed T code, the T code of the tool to be
selected is set to the punching position in the CHANGE TOOL of the tool number registration screen
beforehand. If the T code is instructed when the tool change signal (input) TCNG is 1 by the MDI
command, the control unit carries out processing as if the T code set in the tool change screen was
instructed for the instructed T code. In other words, the tool corresponding to the converted T code is
positioned to the punching position and the converted T code is output as the T code signal.
The signal TCNG is valid only for the MDI command. Also, the signal TNG is valid even if the signal
TCNG is 1.
Signal
Tool change signal TCNG<Gn233.6>
[Function] This signal is used to execute T command for tool change.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn233 TCNG
- 62 -
5.3.3 Turret Indexing Completion Signal

Overview
Although the turret axis control has been described in detail up to this point, the following is included in
the description:
The above explanation shows only one example. For example, in the case of mechanical clamping, the
machine side should judge that no clamping can be carried out for some reason and should also carry out
some countermeasures for it.
The machine side should perform confirmation, judge to see if it is proper to carry out clamping, or
perform some countermeasures, assuming that the position cannot be mechanically clamped for some
reason (in general, shot pins cannot be inserted) when the turret axis was positioned at the location set in
the tool registration screen for example, the commanded T code beforehand.
There is no problem even if the following conditions should occur as far as the machine side can perform
the above confirmation.
Namely, when the T05 is commanded and turret indexing is performed while the T01 tools are being
selected, the turret axis reduces its speed and stops and the axis moving signal MVT of the turret axis is
turned to 0 at the same time the deceleration is terminated if the automatic operation stop signal *SP is
turned to 0 during turret axis positioning.
Afterwards, inposition signal INPT of the turret axis is turned to 1 and becomes the automatic
operation stop state.
Even if signal MVT is 0 and INPT is 1, the following results if the machine side judges whether shot
pins can be inserted or not:
Namely, clamping by shot pins can be done if shot pins can be inserted and no clamping can be done if
shot pins cannot be inserted.
When signal *SP is turned to 1 and automatic operation is restarted by cycle start, the turret axis can be
positioned at the commanded T05 location and the T05 tools can be selected.
The following turret indexing completion signal TIE was added for reducing processing at the machine
side.
In other words, signal TIE is 0 when the turret axis movement is started (including when interlock is
applied to the axis movement with interlock signal *ITT of the turret axis set to 0), and it is 1 only
when the positioning of the turret axis to the instructed T code is completed. Consequently, if it is
confirmed that signal MVT is 0, signal INPT is 1 and signal TIE is 1, and the turret is clamped by a
shot pin, it is not necessary to check whether it is a position in which to clamp at the machine side.
- 63 -
Execution of the block

Execution of the block by a T command

T00 to T31<Fn026 to Fn029>

TF<Fn007.3>
Axis moving signals

MV<Fn102>
In-position signals
INP<Fn104>
Turret IndexingCompletion
signal TIE<Fn232.6>

*IT<Gn130>
Servo off signals

SVF<Gn126>
Mechanical clamp
complete
Mechanical clamp using
shot pins or the like
Operation
complete
Operation on m achine
side reacting to T code Operation start
Axis movement

Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
Feed hold signal

*SP<Gn008.5> Time set in parameter 3011
Cycle start signal

ST<Gn007.2>
Fig.5.3.3 Turret Indexing Completion Signal TIE<Fn232.6>
CAUTION
1 TIE is turned to 1; however the transmission timing is at the moment when
deceleration begins. The turret must be neither clamped nor released from
clamping, therefore, using a shot pin, etc. merely on receiving the signal TIE.
The conditions of signals MVT and INPT must be applied.
2 After emergency stop or the servo alarm is released after power on, the TIE signal
remains 0 until manual reference position return of the turret axis is completed, and
the machine position of the turret axis is established.
Signal
Turret indexing completion signal TIE<Fn232.6>
[Function] This signal informs the PMC that the turret axis was completely positioned.
- 64 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn232 TIE
WARNING
If the servooff signal is used under Taxis control, setting the *FLWU signal <Gn007.7>
to 0 causes the followup function to operate at servooff. This sets the TIE signal to
0. Taxis indexing may not be executed correctly. To prevent such problems from
occurring, set the *FLWU <Gn007.7> signal to 1.
5.3.4 T Code Display Signal

Overview
The station number (tool number) being set when the power is turned on is displayed on the position
display screen. The number to be displayed should be set to a PMC address <Gn234 Gn237>.
The station number (Tool number) selected present after the power supply is turned on can be displayed
in the position display in case of the machine which does not do the turret indexing (No T axis control).
Input in binary code of 32 points.
CAUTION
1 Set the data to PMC address <Gn234 Gn237> within CNC ready signal MA
<Fn001.7> is turned to 1 after power is turned on.
2 This signal becomes effective when bit 2 (PWT) of parameter No. 16262 is set to
1.
When bit 1 (JGT) of parameter No.16262 is set to 1, T codes can be displayed
on the position display screen in the Jog mode by the signals TI00 to TI31.
Signal
T code display signal TI00 to TI31<Gn234 to Gn237>
[Function] This siganal can be displayed the T code at power-on.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn234 TI07 TI06 TI05 TI04 TI03 TI02 TI01 TI00
5.3.5 Number of Punches Signal

Overview
The content of the number of punches of the tool until at that time which corresponds to T code instructed
when T command is done is outputted to PMC from CNC.
It is a binary code signal of 32 points.
Correspond to the number of punches and the signal as follows.
- 65 -
Number of punches =
31
i=0
{2i Pi }
However Pi = 0 when PNi is 0.
Pi = 1 when PNi is 1.
Read of T command

T00 to 31<Fn026 to Fn029>
Number of Punches Signal

PN00 to PN31<Fn234 to Fn237>

TF<Fn007.3>
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
Fig.5.3.5 Number of Punches Signal PN00 to PN31<Fn234 to Fn237>
When the T command is done, T code signal is turned to 1 and the number of punches up to that point
corresponding to the T code is outputted.
The content is maintained until a new T command is done.
CAUTION
Signals PN00 to PN31 are 0 until T command is done for the first time after the
power supply is turned on.
Signal
Number of punches signal PN00 to PN31<Fn234 to Fn237>
[Function] This signal notifies the number of punches of the tool until at that time which corresponds
to T code instructed
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn234 PN07 PN06 PN05 PN04 PN03 PN02 PN01 PN00
- 66 -
5.3.6 Taxis Machine Zero Point Position Signals

Overview
These signals notify the PMC that the machine coordinate of the Taxis agrees with the machine zero
point. The PMC is thus aware of the special tool indexing point.
When the machine coordinate of the Taxis becomes the position set in parameters No. 16680 to No.
16695 under Taxis control, the bit signal corresponding to the parameter is output.
Signal
Taxis machine zero point position signals RP1T to RP16T<Fn244, Fn245>
[Function] These signals notify that the machine coordinate of the Taxis agrees with the machine
zero point.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn244 RP8T RP7T RP6T RP5T RP4T RP3T RP2T RP1T
Parameter
16680 Position of machine zero point 1 on Taxis
- 67 -

[Unit of data] degree (machine unit)
(B))
Set each position of machine zero point on Taxis to set each Taxis machine zero point
position signal RP1T to RP16T<Fn244 to Fn245> to 1.
When the machine coordinate of the Taxis matches the position specified in each
parameter, each Taxis machine zero point position signal is output.
WARNING
If the servooff signal is used under Taxis control, setting the *FLWU signal <Gn007.7>
to 0 causes the followup function to operate at servooff. This sets RP1T to RP16T
signals to 0. Taxis indexing may not be executed correctly. To prevent such problems
from occurring, set the *FLWU <Gn007.7> signal to 1.
- 68 -
5.4 MULTIPLETOOL CONTROL

Overview
A common way of handling the tools, i.e., the metal dies, for punch presses is to store each die in the tool
holder. To select a tool, it is necessary to index the magazine containing the required tool holder to the
position at which the tool is changed with a T command and to set the tool holder on the punch holder at
that position.
In the multipletool system, however, one tool holder contains different types of metal dies. This makes it
possible to change tools by simply moving the relevant tool holder. The multipletool system, therefore,
reduces the time taken to change tools and enables a larger variety of tools to be used, enhancing the
range of machining that can be performed.
Tool
Tool holder
Turret
Rotation of the turret
Subtool Multiple-tool holder
Rotation of the multiple-tool holder
Fig.5.4 (a) Multipletool system
CAUTION
To use multiple-tool control, set 1 in bit 0 (EMT) of parameter No. 16287.
Function
(1) Pot number
In the multipletool system, each tool holder is assigned a pot numberspecified as part of a threeor
fourdigit T code as follows:
T
Number of the tool in the tool holder
Pot number (indicating the tool holder)
- 69 -
When the CNC controls the indexing of the tool holder, the T code shall contain a twodigit pot number
from 00 to 99 as shown above. Specify a threeor fourdigit T code to use the multipletool system. The
first two digits are the pot number and the last two digits are the number of the tool. When the T code is
specified, a binary code signal is sent to the machine.
CAUTION
1 The control numbers that the CNC uses to control the indexing of the tool
holders must be registered in the tool registering screen. The number of
parameters registered must not exceed the number of tools controlled by
indexing (136 maximum).
2 The control numbers that the CNC uses to control the indexing of the tool
holders that are not part of the multipletool system must be specified by a T
code consisting of two digits or less.
3 The tool numbers in the multipletool system must be set in the tool registering
screen for multipletool of tool registering screen.
4 The number of digits used for the tool numbers in the multipletool system can
be changed when the option for the tool data setting function is used.
(2) Relationships between the multipletool system and the C axis

The tools in the multipletool system are selected as the C axis rotates. When a tool is selected, it is
positioned at the tool reference position. The line passing through the tool reference position and the
center point of the tool holder is parallel to the Y axis.
Specify the angular displacement of each tool from the tool reference position in the tool registering
screen for multipletool. When T code for the tool is specified, the CNC reports the angular displacement
to the C axis and tool is positioned at the reference position.
Y Subtool reference position
Center of the subtool

X
Center of the tool holder
T1101
Direction
of rotation
T1104 T1102 Angular displacement controlled

by indexing for the subtool reference
position
T1101 0.00
T1103 T1102 90.00
T1103 180.00
T1104 270.00
Multiple-tool holderT11
Fig.5.4 (b) Subtool reference position and angular displacement controlled by indexing
CAUTION
When the angular displacement for the tool reference position is set to 0, the tool that is
selected when the tool holder has been indexed is used.
- 70 -
(3) Tool position compensation

The centers of the tools move from the center of the tool holder when using the multipletool system.
Therefore, the tool positions need to be compensated. However, the compensation function in the
multipletool system only operates in the direction of the Y axis. Therefore, specify the distance between
the tool reference position and the center of the tool holder for each tool in the tool registering screen for
multipletool as the Yaxis compensation.
Y Punching position
programmed position
Subtool reference position
X
Turret
SubtoolT1101
Yaxis compensation
Multiple-tool holderT11
Fig.5.4 (c) Tool position compensation
CAUTION
To use the compensation function, set bit 2 (TDF) of parameter No.16263 to 1.
Tool change
The following tool changes are possible using the multipletool system.
(1) A regular tool (not in a multipletool holder) to another regular tool
(2) A regular tool to a tool in a multiple tool holder
(3) A tool in a multipletool holder to a regular tool
(4) A tool in a multipletool holder A to a tool in another multipletool holder B
(5) A tool a in a multiple tool A holder to another tool b in the same multiple tool holder A
Tool changes (2) to (5) are described below. (case (1) is omitted.)
(2) A regular tool to a tool in a multiple tool holder

If the C axis is not positioned at the reference position when the T command to select a tool in the
multipletool system is issued, the C axis automatically returns to the reference position.
Then, the necessary T code and the corresponding TF signal are output. The machine returns the FIN
signal as soon as the tool has been indexed, as specified by the first two digits of the T code.
When the FIN signal is returned, the CNC moves the C axis as specified by the last two digits of the T
code and starts indexing the required tool. When indexing the tool starts, the tool indexing signal, CMOK,
is switched to 1. When the tool has been indexed, the MIE signal (the completion signal) is switched to 1
and the CMOK signal is switched to 0. This completes indexing the tool.
- 71 -
T2002
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
T2002 indexing is complete.
Mutiple-tool holder T20 indexing Subtool 02 indexing Signal CMOK <Fn232.5> 0
Output of signals T01 to 31 <Fn026 to Signal CMOK <Fn232.5>1 Signal MIE <Fn232.7> 1
Fn029> and corresponding signal TF
<Fn007.3>
Fig.5.4 (d) Multiple-tool selection command T2002
Timing diagram
T code

T00 to 31<Fn026 to Fn029>

TF<Fn007.3>
Motion specified by T code

Indexing the tool holder
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
Multiple tool indexing complete

signal CMOK<Fn232.5>
Indexing the subtool

(C axis movement) Indexing
the subtool
Multiple tool indexing signal
MIE<Fn232.7>
(3) A tool in a multipletool holder to a regular tool

If the C axis is not positioned at the reference position when the T command for selecting a regular tool is
issued after a tool in a multiple tool holder is selected, the C axis automatically returns to the reference
position. Because the tool in a multiple tool holder is moved with this command, the CMOK signal is
switched to 1 and the MIE signal is switched to 0. When the C axis has returned to the reference
position, the CMOK signal is switched to 0.
signal as soon as the tool has been indexed, as specified by the T code. This completes indexing the tool.
- 72 -
T10
T10 indexing is complete

The C axis returns to the Indexing of tool T10 Signal FIN<Gn004.3>
reference position. Output of signals T00 to 31<Fn026 to
Signal MIE <Fn232.7>0 Fn029> and signal TF <Fn007.3>
Signal CMOK<Fn232.5>1
Fig.5.4 (e) Regular tool selection command T10
Timing diagram
T code

T00 to 31<Fn026 to Fn029>

TF<Fn007.3>
Indexing the
tool holder
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>

(C axis movement) Positioning to the
reference position
MIE<Fn232.7>
(4) A tool in a multipletool holder A to a tool in another multipletool holder B

If the C axis is not positioned at the reference position when the T command for selecting a tool in a
multipletool holder B is issued after a tool in another multiple tool holder A is selected, the C axis
automatically returns to the reference position. Because the tool in the first multiple tool holder is moved
with this command, the CMOK signal is switched to 1 and the MIE signal is switched to 0. When the
C axis has returned to the reference position, the CMOK signal is switched to 0.
signal as soon as the tool has been indexed, as specified by the first two digits of the T code.
code and starts indexing the required tool. When indexing the tool starts, the tool indexing signal, CMOK,
is switched to 1. When the tool has been indexed, the MIE signal is switched to 1 and the CMOK
signal is switched to 0. This completes indexing the tool.
- 73 -
T2002 T4004
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
T4004 indexing is comlpete
The C axis returns to the Indexing of Multiple-tool holder Indexing of subtool 04 CMOK signal <Fn0232.5>0
reference position T40 CMOK signal <Fn232.5>1 MIE signal <Fn232.7>1
Signal MIE<Fn232.7>0 Output of signals T00 to 31<Fn026 to
Signal CMOK<Fn232.5>1 Fn029>and TF signal <Fn007.3>
Fig.5.4 (f) Multiple-tool selection command T4004
Timing diagram
T code

T00 to31<Fn026 to Fn029>

TF<Fn007.3>
Indexing the
tool holder
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>


(C axis movement) Positioning to the Indexing
reference position the subtool
MIE<Fn232.7>
(5) A tool a in a multiple tool holder A to another tool b in the same multiple tool
holder A
When the T command for a tool b in a multipletool holder A is issued after another tool a in the same
tool holder A has been selected, the necessary T code and the corresponding TF signal are output. The
machine then returns the FIN signal. (If necessary, move the tool holder according to the T command, and
return the FIN signal after completion.)
code and starts indexing the required tool b. When indexing the tool starts, the tool b indexing signal,
CMOK, is switched to 1. When the tool b has been indexed, the MIE signal is switched to 1 and the
CMOK signal is switched to 0. This completes indexing the tool b.
- 74 -
T2001 T2002
T2002 indexing is complete

Indexing of subtool 02 MIE signal<Fn232.7>1
MIE signal<Fn232.7>0 CMOK siganl<Fn232.5>0
CMOK signal<Fn232.5>1
Fig.5.4 (g) Multiple-tool selection command T2002
CAUTION
1 It is necessary to combine the Caxis control option to use multipletool control
2 When using multipletool control, do not issue a Caxis command.
3 When using multipletool control, set parameter No. 3032 to 3 or 4. To index a
tool in a multipletool holder, specify a T code consisting of at least three digits.
To index a regular tool, specify a T code consisting of two digits or less.
4 The MIE signal, which indicates that indexing the tool in a multipletool holder is
complete, is switched to 1 when a tool has been indexed. However, switching
the MIE signal to 1 is synchronized with the start of Caxis deceleration.
5 When using multipletool control, set bit 5 (CRM) of parameter No. 16362 to 0.
6 It is possible to create an image of a tool in the multipletool system on the
graphic screen. Specify the tool contour on the tool contour setting screen. Tools
in the multiple system are assigned numbers 101 to 164, as specified by the T
code. The procedure for inputting and outputting the contours of tool in the
multipletool system is the same as for regular tools.
7 The number of digits used for the tool numbers in the multipletool system can
be changed when the option for the tool data setting function is used.
Signal
Multiple tool indexing signal CMOK<Fn232.5>
[Function] The signal notifies the multipletool indexing.
[Output cond.] Please refer to above "Overview ", "Function", and "Tool change" for details.
Multiple tool indexing complete signal MIE<Fn232.7>

[Function] The signal notifies that indexing the tool in a multipletool holder is complete.
[Output cond.] Please refer to above "Overview ", "Function", and "Tool change" for details.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn232 MIE CMOK
- 75 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16287 EMT
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Data type] Bit
#0 EMT Multiple-tool control is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
5.5 TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION

Overview
This function makes the area used for registering tool numbers, tool position compensation, punch count,
and other tool data available to the user. This enables the user to customize the registered tool data. This
allows the conventional tool data setting method to be changed and the number of tools that can be
registered to be increased considerably.
Registration area
A memory area consisting of 32KB (321024 bytes) is provided for the tool data setting function.
Type and size of tool data

Tool data can be customized, as listed below, by specifying parameters.
Individual tools cannot have more than one setting. All registered toolswill have the same setting.
Table.5.5 (a) Tool Registration Screen : kind of tool data and memory size
Size
Tool data item Tool data setting function option Tool data setting function option
none provided
Can be expanded to up to 9999 by
Number of tools 136
the parameter setting condition.
Can be selected 2(byte) or 4 (byte).
2 (byte)
Tool number When 4 (byte) is Selected,
(Tool number having up to 4 digits)
tool number having up to 8 digits.
Tool position
8 (byte) Can be selected not used or 8 (byte)
compensation X
Tool position
compensation Y
Taxis machine position 8 (byte) Can be selected not used or 8 (byte)
Can be selected not used or 2 (byte)
Punch count 4 (byte)
or 4 (byte)
Can be selected not used, 2 (byte),
2 (byte)
Tool number for changing or 4 (byte)
(Tool number for changing tools
tools When used, memory size is same to
having up to 4 digits)
the memory size for tool number.
Tool figure for graphics
25 (byte) Can be selected not used or 25(byte)
(*1)
When used, memory size is same to
Tool life management (*2) 4 (byte)
the memory size for punch count.
*1 : The graphic function option is necessary.
- 76 -
*2 : The tool life management function option is necessary.
Table5.5 (b) Tool Registration Screen for multiple tools : kind of tool data and memory size
Size
Tool data item Tool data setting function option Tool data setting function option
none provided
Can be expanded to up to 9999 by
Number of subtool 64
the parameter setting condition.
2 (byte) 2 (byte)
Multitool subtool number (Multitool subtool number having (Multitool subtool number having
up to 2 digits) up to 4 digits)
Multitool angle 8 (byte) 8 (byte)
Not used
Multitool tool position
(There is no dysplayed item Can be selected not used or 8 (byte)
compensation X
corresponding to this condition)
Multitool tool position
compensation Y
Tool figure for multitool
25 (byte) Can be selected not used or 25(byte)
graphics (*1)
*1 : The graphic function option is necessary.
Tool number
When specifying up to four digits with a T command, select 2 bytes. When specifying five or more digits
with a T command, select 4 bytes.
If the 4byte option is selected, Taxis control is possible with a T command having five or more digits.
Xaxis and Yaxis tool position compensation

Enable or disable tool position compensation. A range of 8 bytes enabling compensation values to be set
in the corresponding range, in output increments.
Taxis machine position

Set this when Taxis control is used.
Punch count
Select whether to use individual punch counts. A range of either two or four bytes can be selected. This
item must be set when the tool life management function is used.
Tool change tool number

Set this when using the tool change function. The data agrees with that of the tool number.
Tool figure
Select this when drawing a tool using the graphic function. Each tool requires 25 bytes of data.
Figure data : 1byte
Vertical dimension data : 8byte
Horizontal dimension data : 8byte
Angle data : 8byte
Tool life management

Select this when using the tool life management function. The data agrees with that of the punch count.
Multitool subtool number

Select this when using multitool control. Up to four digits can be specified for a subtool number when the
corresponding number of digits is registered.
- 77 -
This item can also be used to specify whether a magazine number and subtool number are registered
together or separately. When separately registering the magazine number and subtool number, the number
of subtools to be registered must be set as a parameter.
Multitool angle
Set a subtool indexing angle when using multitool control. If the magazine number and subtool number
are registered together, the angle for tools other than the multitool must be set to 0.
Multitool tool position compensation

Set this when executing multitool tool position compensation in the X and Y directions.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16280 UTL UTS UCT UPC UTC UOY UOX UT8
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
2 This parameter is valid when the function used to set tool data is
specified.
3 In the following description, n represents the number of tools to be
stored.

#0 UT8 As a tool number:

0: Up to eight digits can be input. (n 4byte numbers)
1: Up to four digits can be input. (n 2byte numbers)
#1 UOX A tool position compensation value along the Xaxis is:
0: Not stored.
1: Stored. (n 8byte values)
#2 UOY A tool position compensation value along the Yaxis is:

0: Not stored.
#3 UTC Under Taxis control, the machine position on the Taxis is:
0: Not stored.
NOTE
When Taxis control is used (TCL bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 16260)
is 1), this bit should be set to 1.
#4 UPC The punching count of an individual tool is:

0: Not stored.
1: Stored. See the description of the PC4 bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 16281).
- 78 -
NOTE
When the tool life management data is used, this bit should be set to
1.
#5 UCT Tool numbers for changing tools are:

0: Not stored.
1: Stored. The number of digits is the same as that for the UT8 bit (bit 0 of parameter
No. 16280).
#6 UTS A graphic tool figure is:

0: Not stored.
#7 UTL The tool life management data is:

0: Not stored.
1: Stored. (n 25byte values) The data is stored in the same way as for the PC4 bit (bit
4 of parameter No. 16281).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16281 PC4
NOTE
specified.
3 In the following description, n represents the number of tools to be
stored.

#4 PC4 For the punching count of individual tools:

0: n fourbyte values can be stored. The valid data range is 0 to 99999999.
1: n twobyte values can be stored. The valid data range is 0 to 65535.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16282 MTS CMT MOY MOX
NOTE
2 This parameter is valid when multiple-tool control function and the
function used to set tool data is specified.
3 In the following description, m represents the number of subtools
stored for a multitool.

#1 MOX The tool position compensation value along the Xaxis for a multitool is:
0: Not stored.
- 79 -
1: Stored. (m 8byte numbers)
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the CMT bit (bit 5 of parameter No.
16282) is set to 1.
#2 MOY The tool position compensation value along the Yaxis for a multitool is:
0: Not stored.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the CMT bit (bit 5 of parameter No.
16282) is set to 1.
#3 MTR The radius of a multitool is:

0: Not stored.
#5 CMT The tool numbers for a multitool:

0: Are the tool holder number plus subtool number. When this is selected, m equals n
(number of tools stored).
1: Consist of the magazine number and subtool number, which are separately stored.
(m 2byte numbers)
#6 MTS The graphic tool figure for a multitool is:

0: Not stored.
1: Stored. (n 25bytes data items)
NOTE
This bit is valid when the CMT bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 16282) is
set to 1.
16284 Number of tools to be stored
NOTE
specified.

[Data type] Word path
This parameter specifies the number of tools to be stored for the function used to set tool
data.
NOTE
When the amount of size for tool data to be stored exceeds 32KB, the
alarm (PW4549) is issued.
16285 Number of digits in the tool number of an subtool for a multitool
- 80 -
NOTE
specified.

This parameter specifies the number of digits that can be specified for the tool number of
an subtool for which multiple tool control is executed by the function used to set tool
data.
16286 Number of subtools for a multitool
NOTE
specified and the CMT bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 16282) is set to 1.

This parameter specifies the number of subtools for which multiple tool control is
executed by the function used to set tool data.
NOTE
When the amount of size for subtool data and tool data to be stored
exceeds 32KB, the alarm (PW4549) is issued.
Sample registration data

When 300 tools is registered by the following content:
The tool data setting function is provided.
The multiple-tool control function is not provided.
The graphic function is provided.
Tool number has 8disits : 4byte Bit 0 (UT8) of parameter No. 16280=0
Tool position compensation X : 8byte Bit 1 (UOX) of parameter No. 16280=1
Tool position compensation Y : 8byte Bit 2 (UOY) of parameter No. 16280=1
Taxis machine position : 8byte Bit 3 (UTC) of parameter No. 16280=1
Punch count has 9digits : 4byte Bit 4 (UPC) of parameter No. 16280=1
Bit 4 (PC4) of parameter No. 16281=0
Tool number for changing tools has 8 digits : 4byte Bit 5 (UCT) of parameter No. 16280=1
Tool figure for multitool graphics : 25byte Bit 6 (UTS) of parameter No. 16280=1
Number of tools : 300 Parameter No.16284 = 300
Total 4+8+8+8+4+4+25byte 300 = 18300byte
The values of the parameters follow:
- 81 -
#7 UTL #6 UTS #5 UCT #4 UPC #3 UTC #2 UOY #1 UOX #0 UT8

16280 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
#7 #6 #5 #4 PC4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16281 - - - 0 - - - -
#7 #6 MTS #5 CMT #4 #3 #2 MOY #1 MOX #0
16282 - 0 0 - - 0 0 -
Number of tools to be stored
16284 300
Number of digits in the tool number of an subtool for a multitool
16285 0
Number of subtools for a multitool
16286 0
Alarm and message

PW4549 ILLEGAL TOOL DATA FORMAT The size of the registered tool data patterns has exceeded
the upperlimit of 32KB.
5.6 UNREGISTERED T CODE SIGNAL

Overview
The unregistered T code signal is output if a T code which is not registered using the tool data registration
screen is specified during automatic operation.
The PMC can monitor this signal and issue an alarm if it is output, for example, to prevent punching from
being performed according to a command specifying an unregistered tool.
Siganal
Unregistered T code signal NRTCD<Fn242.0>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that a T code which is not registered in the tool data registration screen
has been specified.
[Output cond.] This signal is output if a T code which is not registered in the tool data registration screen
is specified during automatic operation when bit 5 (TNA) of parameter No. 16262 is set
to 1.
The output timing is the same as that for a T code signal. The state of the signal is
maintained in the same way as for a T code signal.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn242 NRTCD
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16262 TNA

#5 TNA When a tool number which is not cataloged is specified,

0: Alarm 4692 is issued.
1: No alarm are issued but a T code is output.
- 82 -
5.7 MANUAL TOOL CHANGE

Overview
In JOG mode, setting signal MNTCHG to 1 enables the tool to be changed easily in manual mode, as
follows:
<1> In JOG mode, set signal MNTCHG to 1.
<2> Signal MNTMOD goes to 1.
<3> If the Caxis is not positioned to the reference position, perform reference position return for the
Caxis.
<4> Signal STAXS goes to 1, thus notifying the PMC that Taxis movement is possible. Remove the
shot pins or other mechanical clamps.
<5> The PMC sets signal TAXSJ to 1. Change the tool by moving the Taxis by means of jog feed.
<6> After changing the tool, set signal MNTCHG to 0.
<7> The CNC sets signal STAXS to 0. Replace the shot pins or other mechanical clamps.
<8> Once the machine has completed tool change operation, set signal TAXSJ to 0.
<9> If the newly selected tool is an index tool for which Caxis compensation is set, apply Caxis
position compensation corresponding to the T code.
<10> Set signal MNTMOD to 0. This completes the tool change sequence.
Manual tool change siganal

MNTCHG<Gn240.3>
Manual tool change in-progress siganal

MNTMOD<Fn233.3>
C-axis operation
C-axis reference C-axis
position return compensation
Taxis selected signal
STAXS<Fn233.2>
Taxis selection signal

TAXSJ<Gn240.1>
T-axis movement tool change

Tool change operation
Fig.5.7 (a) Manual tool change
Signal
Manual tool change signal MNTCHG<Gn240.3>
[Function] Notifies the CNC that tool change will be performed in JOG mode.
Taxis selection signal TAXSJ<Gn240.1>

[Function] Notifies the CNC that Taxis movement has become possible in JOG mode.
The CNC does not perform the next operation until the state of this signal matches that of
signal STAXS.
Manual tool change inprogress signal MNTMOD<Fn233.3>

[Function] Notifies the PMC that manual tool change is being performed.
- 83 -
Taxis selected signal STAXS<Fn233.2>

[Function] Notifies the PMC that the Caxis is positioned to the reference position and that Taxis
movement is possible.
NOTE
1 Caxis reference position return is always performed in the
direction specified with bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No. 1006.
2 If a reset is performed during tool change, set signal MNTCHG to
0 before restarting tool change.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn240 MNTCHG TAXSJ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn233 MNTMOD STAXS
- 84 -
B-64623EN/01 6.CAXIS CONTROL
6 CAXIS CONTROL
Chapter 6, C-AXIS CONTROL, consists of the following sections:
6.1 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING)...............................................................................85

6.2 CAXIS SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL....................................................................................86
6.3 CAXIS OFFSET FUNCTION ..........................................................................................................90
6.1 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING)

Overview
For predetermined dies (tools) on a turret, the angular position of the die can be changed with a command
from a tape, a memory or MDI.
In the past, it was necessary to use many dies when the die shape is the same but the die arrangement is
different. Even in such a case, this new function makes it possible to conduct the operations only with one
die since the function can freely change the angular position of the die. Further, since chamfering of four
corners of a workpiece can be performed only with one die, the time required for die change is reduced,
resulting in shorter machining time.
Further, in pattern function for a circular geometry bolt hole circle, arc pattern, and arc nibbling function,
the C axis is automatically controlled so that one side of the die always faces the center of arc at each
punching position.
CAUTION
1 The punch section and the die section of the die can be controlled by the same
motors or C axis synchronously controlled by the respective servo motors.
2 Set 67 (C) in parameter No.1020 as the name of the axis to control the axis
under the C axis control.
3 The C axis should be set as a rotation axis. (bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006
is set to 1)
4 Setting the following parameters of C axis allows the CNC to be compatible with
FANUC Series 0i-PC, as follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 In the absolute programming, the axis rotates in the
direction in which the distance to the target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the amount of the shift
per one rotation
5 When bit 7 (CBR) of parameter No.16360 is set to 0, backlash compensation

follow parameter setting even if the C axis control is valid.
- 85 -
6.CAXIS CONTROL B-64623EN/01
N3221 G90 G00 X110. Y160. C0. #1 to #4Order of punch motion in N3223
N3222 G72 X50. Y100. : Path of tool
N3223 G26 I60. J90. K4 C45.
+Y
#1:(50.0,160.0)
N3221:(110.0,160.0)
C-axis = 45.0
C-axis = 0.0
C-axis moves along with

X-and Y-axes positioning
#2:(10.0,100.0) N3222
(50.0,100.0)
C-axis = 135.0
+X
C-axis moves along with
#4:(110.0,100.0)
X-and Y-axes positioning
C-axis = 315.0
#3:(50.0,40.0)
C-axis = 225.0
Fig.6.1 Example of bolt hole circle (G26) and C command
Reference item
OPERATORS MANUAL (B-64624EN) C AXIS CONTROL
6.2 CAXIS SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL

Overview
The Caxis synchronization control function enables operation of the punch section of the die in sync
with the die section of the die by using a separate servo motor for each section. Caxis synchronization
control simultaneously issues the same command to both servo motors. So, synchronization error
correction, normally required to detect and reduce deviation between the two servo motors during
synchronous operation, is not applied.
In Caxis synchronization control, the master axis is referred to as the C1axis, and the slave axis as the
C2axis.
Axis configuration
If the Caxis synchronous control function is supported, the C1axis is the axis which name is set 67(C)
in the parameter No.1020. If two or more axes have the same axis name, C, the C1axis is assigned the C
axis that has the smallest axis number. The C1axis is referred to as a master axis.
By setting the axis number of the axis that is synchronized with C axis in the parameter No. 16480, the
C2axis is assigned. The C2axis is referred to as a slave axis.
Command
When Caxis synchronization control is applied, the same increment system, maximum values, and so
forth, as used for ordinary Caxis control, are used. The C1axis and C2axis are controlled by
programmed C commands.
- 86 -
Manual reference position return

In manual reference position return, Caxis synchronization control is not applied, but a reference
position return operation is independently performed for each of the C1axis and C2axis. A deceleration
signal for reference position return and a reference position return completion signal are provided
separately for the C1axis and C2axis, so that reference position return is performed in the ordinary way.
Each signal is provided for each axis number.
Create a sequence on the PMC side so that synchronous operation is enabled when the reference position
return completion signals for both the C1axis and C2axis are set to 1.
CAUTION
Upon poweron, emergency stop, or servo alarm release, the machine positions for the
C1axis and C2axis will shift. In such cases, therefore, always perform manual
reference position return to correct the machine positions.
Manual operation
When Caxis synchronization control is applied, jog feed, incremental feed, and handle feed cannot be
performed. Synchronous operation, however, is enabled by setting synchronization control signal
SYNCJn <Gn140> (n: Axis number of the C2axis) to 1. In this case, synchronous operation is
performed by issuing commands to the C1axis only; no commands can be issued to the C2axis.
Synchronization error alarm

During Caxis synchronous operation, position deviation of the C1axis and C2axis is monitored. The
maximum allowable position deviation is set in parameter Nos. 16364 and 16365. If the position
deviation error for the C1axis or C2axis exceeds the value set in the corresponding parameter during
synchronous operation, alarm (DS4603) is issued.
Two parameters are provided for setting the maximum allowable position deviation errors. One parameter
is effective when nibbling is performed, and the other when nibbling is not performed.
Synchronization
The positions on the C1axis and C2axis may be displaced relative to each other during poweroff or in
the event of an emergency stop. This function enables the correction of such displacement. After the
followup performed immediately after poweron, a compensation pulse signal is output to the C2axis to
match the C2axis machine position to that of the C1axis machine position. Note that this function is
effective only when the absolute position detection function is applied to the Caxis.
CAUTION
1 To use Caxis synchronization, set bit 4 (ACS) of parameter No. 16360 to 1.
2 The synchronization function is enabled after a reference position has been
established.
3 A synchronization error is represented by the position deviation on the C2axis
when a stop is performed. The position deviation is indicated by the detection
unit as diagnosis data No. 300. When this value exceeds the value set in
parameter No. 16368, servo alarm (SV0410) is issued. This alarm can be
released by using the reset key, but the position on the C2axis will remain
displaced. So, correct the position by performing manual reference position
return.
4 When the Caxis offset function is used, synchronization may not be performed
normally if an emergency stop or reset operation is performed during Caxis
movement. So, alarm (DS4605) is issued if a C command is specified. In this
case, perform position correction by means of manual reference position return.
- 87 -
Signal
Caxis control status signal SC1, SC2<Fn233.0, Fn233.1>
[Function] These signals notify the PMC of whether Caxis independent control or Caxis
synchronization control is applied.
[Output cond.] These signals are set to 1 upon poweron in the following cases:
SC1: When Caxis control is applied
SC2: When Caxis synchronization control is applied
(when using the C1axis and C2axis)
These signals are set to 0 in the following cases:
SC1: When Caxis control is not applied
SC2: When Caxis synchronization control is not applied
(when Caxis independent control is applied)
Synchronous manual feed select signal SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8<Gn140>

[Function] Caxis synchronization control is applied when jog feed, handle feed, or incremental feed
is performed.
SYNCJx
x : 1 ..... The 1st axis is the C2axis.
2 ..... The 2nd axis is the C2axis.
3 ..... The 3rd axis is the C2axis.
4 ..... The 4th axis is the C2axis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, a move command for the C1axis is also issued to the
C2axis.
Never change the setting of this signal while movement is being performed.
Set this signal to 0 in other than manual operation mode.
CAUTION
1 During synchronous operation, an input signal provided for each
axis must be entered separately and simultaneously for the C1axis
and C2axis.
2 An output signal provided for each axis is output separately for the
C1axis and C2axis.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn140 SYNCJ8 SYNCJ7 SYNCJ6 SYNCJ5 SYNCJ4 SYNCJ3 SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn233 SC2 SC1
- 88 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16360 ACS SYN
NOTE

#0 SYN Caxis synchronous control is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#4 ACS Under Caxis synchronous control, synchronization is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
16364 Upper limit of error under Caxis synchronous control

[Unit of data] Detection unit
When the absolute value of the position error between the C1axis and C2axis exceeds
the value set in this parameter under Caxis synchronous control, alarm (DS4603) occurs.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the SYN bit (bit 0 of parameter No.
16360) is set to 1.
16365 Upper limit of error under Caxis synchronous control (during continuous pressing)

When the absolute value of the position error between the C1axis and C2axis exceeds
the value set in this parameter while continuous pressing signal NBL is set to 1, alarm
(DS4603) occurs.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the SYN bit (bit 0 of parameter No.
16360) is set to 1.
16368 Maximum compensation in Caxis synchronization

- 89 -
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting
table(B))
This parameter specifies the maximum compensation in Caxis synchronization under

Caxis synchronous control. If an actual compensation value exceeds this value, alarm
(SV0410) occurs in the stop state or during travel.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the ACS bit (bit 4 of parameter No.
16360) is set to 1.
Alarm and message

DS4603 C AXIS SYNCHRONOUS ERROR The difference between the position deviation value of C1
axis and C2 axis exceeds the parameter value (No. 16364,
16365) with the C axis synchronous control function.
DS4605 NEED C AXIS REFERENCE RETURN The C axis synchronization is not done normally.
6.3 CAXIS OFFSET FUNCTION

Overview
For the punch press, a tool is used which allows the angle to be changed according to the machine. This
type of rotary tool is subject to CNC Caxis control. A C command is used to change the angular position
of a tool. When a machine controlling multiple tools of this type is used, mechanical adjustment of each
tool is necessary to ensure correct punching.
This function simplifies mechanical adjustment by performing automatic Caxis offset when indexing up
to 20 tools that allow angle changes. A machine that uses Caxis synchronization control enables offset to
be performed separately for each of the C1axis and C2axis.
The Caxis offset function supports two types of offset operations.
6.3.1 Caxis Offset Type A

Overview
Upon the completion of tool indexing on the turret by issuing a T command, this function performs offset
at the same time as an angle is specified with a C command.
Operation
Set the number of a tool that supports angle changes in a parameter (Nos. 16370 to 16389). Following the
T command set in the parameter, the CNC performs Caxis offset according to the value set in the
corresponding parameter (Nos. 16430 to 16469). An example program for performing this operation is
shown below.
Parameter No. 16370 = 10 (Tool number 10)

Parameter No. 16430 = 0.1(Offset 0.1 )
- 90 -
(Example program)
N100 X Y T10 ;
:
N110 X Y T20 ;
:
N120 X Y T10 C90. ;
:
N130 G28 ;
The N100 block specifies rotary tool T10. So, Caxis movement by an offset of 0.1 is performed once
positioning along the Xaxis, Yaxis, and Taxis has been completed, and completion signal FIN for the
T command is returned.
The N110 block specifies a tool change command. So, Caxis offset is canceled, and reference position
return is performed.
The N120 block specifies rotary tool T10. So, Caxis movement by 90.00 plus an offset of 0.1 is
performed once positioning along the Xaxis, Yaxis, and Taxis has been completed, and completion
signal FIN for the T command is returned.
The N130 block performs reference position return while cancelling
Caxis offset.
Cancelling the offset

Caxis offset is canceled by the following programmed commands:
(a) T command
(b) G28 command
Caxis offset is not canceled by a reset, but can be canceled by setting bit 0 (RC0) of parameter No.
16362. When Caxis synchronization control is applied, and the C1axis offset differs from the C2axis
offset, however, the (C2 - C1) offset is not canceled. Instead, this (C2 - C1) offset is canceled upon
execution of the next T command or G28 command.
CAUTION
1 When using this function, set bit 2 (MAI) of parameter No. 16360 to 1 and bit 3
(MAB) of parameter No. 16360 to 0.
2 When using this function, enable movement along the T axis (by setting bit 5
(CRM) of parameter No. 16362 to 0) only when the tool is at the reference
position on the Caxis.
3 When multipletool control is applied together with this function, this function is
applied to the multipletool holder.
Set the number of the multipletool holder as that of a tool that supports angle
change.
4 If the C1axis offset differs from the C2axis offset when Caxis synchronization
control is applied, no synchronization error check is made as part of an offset
operation or Caxis positioning including offset cancellation.
- 91 -
6.3.2 Caxis Offset Type B

Overview
This function performs Caxis offset as part of a tool change operation based on a T command, either
before or after the mechanical attachment/detachment of rotary tools and tool holders.
Operation
(1) Exchanging a regular tool with a rotary tool or a tool in a multipletool holder
T command

T00 to 31<Fn026 to Fn029>
Tool function strove signal

TF<Fn007.3>
Tool indexing (for T axis)
C axis operation
Next block
Coupling enable signal

CPEN<Fn232.4>
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
Coupling operation
Caxis unconnected signal

CFDC<Gn233.7>
Caxis connection confirmation
<1> <2> <3> <4>
Fig.6.3.2 (a) Operation example of exchanging a regular tool with a tool is specified for C-axis control
<1> When a T command supporting angle change or multipletool control is specified, a T code and the
TF signal are output. At the same time, tool indexing and Caxis offset are performed.
<2> Upon the completion of tool indexing and Caxis offset, the CNC sets the coupling enable signal
CPEN to 1. Using this signal, the machine couples the Caxis and tool holder. The PMC sets
Caxis unconnected signal CFDC to 0 to notify the CNC that coupling has been completed.
<3> Then upon the completion of tool change, the PMC returns the FIN signal to the CNC.
<4> Tool angle change is performed according to the Caxis command. When multipletool control is
applied, tool indexing is performed within the multipletool holder.
- 92 -
(2) Exchanging a rotary tool or tool in a multipletool holder with a regular tool
T command

T00 to 31<Fn026 to Fn029>
Tool function strove signal

TF<Fn007.3>
Tool indexing (for T axis)
C axis operation
Coupling enable signal

CPEN<Fn232.4>
Completion signal Next block

FIN<Gn004.3>
Operation detaching Caxis

from tool holder.
Caxis unconnected signal

CFDC<Gn233.7>
<1> <2> <3> <4><5>
Fig.6.3.2 (b)
<1> When a regular tool command is specified, the CNC performs positioning at an angle of 0 on the
Caxis. When a multipletool holder is selected, the tool at 0 within the multipletool holder is
indexed. Then, the CNC sets the CPEN signal to 0.
<2> When the CPEN signal is set to 0, the machine detaches the Caxis from tool holder.
<3> Once the Caxis is detached, the PMC sets the CFDC signal to 1. When the CFDC signal is set to
1, the CNC cancels the Caxis offset, and performs reference position return.
<4> Then, a T code and TF signal are output, after which tool indexing is performed.
<5> The PMC returns the TFIN signal to the CNC upon the completion of tool change.
CAUTION
1 When using this function, set bit 2 (MAI) of parameter No.16360 to 1 and bit 3
(MAB) of parameter No. 16360 to 1.
2 When using this function, enable movement along the T axis (by setting bit 5
(CRM) of parameter No. 16362 to 0) only when the tool is at the reference
position on the Caxis.
3 When multipletool control is applied together with this function, this function is
applied to the multipletool holder. Set the number of the multipletool holder as
that of a tool that supports angle change.
4 If the C1axis offset differs from the C2axis offset when Caxis synchronization
control is applied, no synchronization error check is made as part of an offset
operation or Caxis positioning including offset cancellation.
Signal
Coupling enable signal CPEN<Fn232.4>
[Classification] Output siganal
- 93 -
[Function] When Caxis offset type B is used, this signal posts that Caxis offset is performed, and
that the Caxis and tool holder are ready for coupling.
[Output cond.] Please refer to above "Operation" for details.
Caxis unconnected signal CFDC<Gn233.7>

[Classification] Input siganal
[Function] When Caxis offset type B is used, this signal posts that the Caxis and tool holder are
not mechanically coupled, hence are inoperative.
[Output cond.] Please refer to above "Operation " for details.
CAUTION
When the Caxis and tool holder are not mechanically coupled, set this
signal to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn233 CFDC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn232 CPEN
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16360 MAB MAI
NOTE

#2 MAI The function for compensating the Caxis position is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
#3 MAB The function B for compensating the C-axis position is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16362 CRM RCO

#0 RCO At reset, compensation of Caxis position is:

0: Not canceled.
1: Canceled.
#5 CRM According to a T command, the machine is:

0: Moved along the Caxis to the reference point.
1: Not moved along the Caxis to the reference point.
- 94 -
16370 Number of tool 1 for which Caxis control can be executed

Each of the parameters set the number of a tool for which Caxis control can be executed.
Caxis control can be effective for the tool set to this parameter.
16430 Caxis position compensation 1
- 95 -

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data(refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Each of these parameters specifies a Caxis position compensation value (C1axis
backlash under Caxis synchronous control).
These compensated values correspond to the tool numbers set in parameter Nos. 16370 to
16389.
NOTE
The values validated when bit 2 (MAI) of parameter No. 16360 is
set to 1.
16450 C2axis position compensation 1
- 96 -

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
Each of these parameters specifies a C2axis position compensation value.

These compensated values correspond to the tool numbers set in parameter Nos. 16370 to
16389.
NOTE
These parameters are valid when both the SYN and MAI bits (bits
0 and 2 of parameter No. 16360) are set to 1.
- 97 -
7.TAXIS/CAXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL B-64623EN/01
7 TAXIS/CAXIS SIMULTANEOUS
CONTROL
Chapter 7, TAXIS/CAXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL, consists of the following sections:
7.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................98

7.2 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................................................98
7.3 PARAMETER...................................................................................................................................100
7.4 CAUTION.........................................................................................................................................100
7.1 OVERVIEW
Normal turret punch press machines cannot perform Taxis movement and Caxis movement at the same
time because of their machine structure limits. Therefore, if the T command and C command are issued at
the same time, a CNC executes these commands in sequence.
This function allows the machines that are free from the structure limits to perform Taxis and Caxis
simultaneous control for the reduction of the cycle time.
7.2 SPECIFICATIONS
Conventional control
If the T and C commands are specified in a single block, the conventional control function divides the
block into three blocks to be executed in succession, as shown in Fig.7.2 (a). This means that a Taxis
movement and Caxis movement cannot be made simultaneously.
Sample program Actual operation sequence

G00 X100.0 Y200.0 T10 <1> G00 X100.0 Y200.0 C(R)
C90.0 ; (Note) C(R): Reference position return command
<2> T10 ;
<3> C90.0 ;
- 98 -
B-64623EN/01 7.TAXIS/CAXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL
Xaxis/Yaxis movement
Taxis movement
Caxis movement

T00 to T31<Fn026 to 029>

TF<Fn007.3>
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
Press start signal

PF <Y0004.2>
<1> <2> <3>
Fig.7.2 (a) Conventional control
Taxis/Caxis simultaneous control

This function allows a Taxis movement and Caxis movement to be made simultaneously, as shown in
Fig.7.2 (b). This eliminates the reference position return about the Caxis (in the conventional control
sequence).
Sample program Actual operation sequence

G00 X100.0 Y200.0 T10 G00 X100.0 Y200.0 T10 C90.0 ;
C90.0 ; (Note) Movement on all the specified axes
No reference position return about the Caxis
Xaxis/Yaxis movement
Taxis movement
C-axis command : C-axis m oves to C90.0
Caxis movement position.

T00 to T31<Fn026 to Fn029>
TF<Fn007.3>
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
Press start signal

PF <Y0004.2>
Fig.7.2 (b) Taxis/Caxissimultaneous control
- 99 -
7.TAXIS/CAXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL B-64623EN/01
Tools that can be controlled

Whether this function or conventional control is used depends on the type of the tool to be used.
1) Tools that can be controlled by the Taxis/Caxis simultaneous control
Tool which is subjected to turret indexing and allows Caxis control (parameters No. 16370 to
No. 16389)
Multiple tool
2) Tools that can be controlled by the conventional control
Tool which is subjected to turret indexing and does not allow Caxis control
Tool that is not subjected to turret indexing
7.3 PARAMETER
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16363 SML

#4 SML The Taxis/Caxis simultaneous control function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
7.4 CAUTION
This function cannot be used together with the following function:
Caxis offset type B
- 100 -
B-64623EN/01 8.SAFETY ZONE CHECK
8 SAFETY ZONE CHECK

Chapter 8, SAFTY ZONE CHECK, consists of the following sections:
8.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................................101

8.2 TYPES OF SAFTY ZONE CHECK.................................................................................................101
8.3 SETTING THE SAFETY ZONE......................................................................................................104
8.4 SETTING THE TOOL SHAPE AREA ............................................................................................105
8.5 AUTOMATIC SAFETYZONE SETTING.....................................................................................105
8.6 SIGNAL ..........................................................................................................................................111
8.7 PARAMETER...................................................................................................................................113
8.8 ALARM AND MESSAGE ...............................................................................................................120
8.1 OVERVIEW
This is the safety function to set the safety zone for protecting the workpiece holder that holds the
workpiece set on the carriage, and disable punching in that area or forbid the tool to approach thereinto.
Workpiece
Tool
Tool figure area(#0)

Safty zone (#1 to #4)
Workpiece holder
Carriage
Fig.8.1 (a) Outline
This function permits to set tool figure area (#0) and up to four safety zones (#1 - #4), as shown above.
Two types of safety zone check methods are prepared.
8.2 TYPES OF SAFTY ZONE CHECK
8.2.1 Type A
Punch forbidden area and approach forbidden area
The safety zone is settable in two types, punch forbidden area and approach forbidden area, that are set by
the parameter SZ1 to SZ4 (No. 16501#0 - #3) shown below.
- 101 -
8.SAFETY ZONE CHECK B-64623EN/01
(1) Punch forbidden area

When the tool figure area goes into the safety zone and the punching is commanded, an alarm (DS 4800
to DS4803) is given to disable punching. In the case of positioning & punching command in the
automatic operation mode, when the end point of positioning is in the punch forbidden area, an alarm is
given without moving the axis. (Previous check)
In the case of move command without punching, the tool figure area can go into the punch forbidden area,
but manual punching is impossible after going into this area.
Tool figure area
Safty zone(#1)
Carriage
Fig.8.2.1 (a) Punch forbidden area (Type A)
(2) Approach forbidden area

The tool figure area can not go into the safety zone. When the tool figure area approaches into the safety
zone by the move command, the axis is immediately stopped and an alarm (DS 4810 - DS4817, DS4830 -
DS4837) is given.
This is valid in either manual or automatic operation mode.
Tool figure area (#0)
Safty zone (#2)

Axis stops, and alarm
is given.
Carriage
Fig.8.2.1 (b) Approach forbidden area
8.2.2 Type B
Overview
By setting bit 0 (SF0) of parameter No. 16500, the type B safety zone check can be selected. With type B,
no alarm is issued even if a tool enters a safety zone; after confirming the safety of the situation, the
operator can perform a punch operation, or can position the tool to the next punching position without
performing punching.
With type B, all safety zones are handled as punch forbidden areas.
If the tool enters a safety zone, the punchforbidden areaentered signal WDD0 <Fn231.7>, used to
provide notification that the tool has entered a punch forbidden area, is set to 1 in the punch block.
When punching is to be performed in a punchforbidden area, punchenable signal WDC <Gn232.4> is
set to 1 after the operator confirms that punching can be performed safely. After detecting the WDC
signal, the CNC sets the PF signal to 1.
- 102 -
When punching is not to be performed in a punch forbidden area, the press activation lock signal PFL
<Gn230.0> is set to 1. Upon detecting the PFL signal, the CNC moves on to execute the next block.
Block start
YES
Press activation lock signal (PFL) = 1 ?
NO
NO Punch forbidden areaentered signal
(WDD0) = 1?
YES
NO
Punch enable signal (WDC) = 1?
YES YES
Press activation wait signal (PFW) = 1 ?
NO
Press activation signal (PF) = 1
Block end
Fig.8.2.2 Type B
CAUTION
1 If the tool enters a punch forbidden area during nibbling, the WDD0 signal is set
to 1 one punching position before the tool enters punch forbidden area.
2 With type B, the setting of SZ1 to SZ4 (bits 0 to 3 of parameter No. 16501) is
ignored.
- 103 -
8.3 SETTING THE SAFETY ZONE

Overview
Set the machine coordinate value when the workpiece holder is positioned at the tool center (punching
position), in the parameters 16505 16516 in machine units.
+Ywk +Ymcn
Punching position
X1bmcn X1amcn Machine zero point
+Xmc
Safetyzone n
Y1wk Y1mcn
#1 #2 #3 #4
Origin of work X1bwk X1awk +Xwk

coordinate system
1 to 4Safetyzone
Punching position(Machine zero point)Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic
coordinate system setting is performedparameter No.1250
Fig.8.3 (c) Set the value of safty zone
Regarding #1, the safety zone is specified at both ends (X1amcn, X1bmcn) for the Xaxis direction by
parameter No.16505 to 16507, and at the forward end (Y1mcn) of the workpiece holder for the Yaxis
direction by parameter No.16507. Farther, width of workpiece holder along the Xaxis is specified by
parameter No.16540.
The specifying method is the same as for #2, #3 and #4.
CAUTION
1 Please set unnecessary prameters for safety zone to 0.
2 When the safety zone area extension function is specified and bit 4 (SF8) is set
to 1, the safety zone can be set up to eight. In this case, safety zone 5, 6, 7, or 8
is specified by parameter Nos.16930 to 16941.
- 104 -
8.4 SETTING THE TOOL SHAPE AREA

Overview
Punch point
Punch point (Machine zero
(Machine zero point)
point) Tool width measured
along Y-axis direction
Tool width measured radius of circle tool

along X-axis direction
Fig.8.4 Setting of tool shape area
The specification of the area of tool figure sets the size in the X direction and Y direction of the tool by
the parameter (Nos. 16517 to 16532, Nos. 16551 to 16558).
The setting unit is machine unit.
Twelve kinds of or less tool figure can be set.
Moreover, setting bit 1 (RTZ) of parameter No.16540 to 1 allows to set area of the circle tool figure.
When setting area of the circle tool figure, the size in the X direction should be set to the radius of the
circle tool, and the size in the Y direction should be set to 0.
The tool shape area can be changed by using the programmable parameter input function (G10).
Therefore, when multiple tools are used, it is possible to specify the tool shape area meeting the tool No.
(Txx).
CAUTION
1 DI signals of the PMC select a tool figure area.
2 When the safety zone area extension function is specified and bit 5 (T16) is set
to 1, the area of tool can be set up to 16. In this case, area of tool 13 to 16 is
specified by parameter Nos.16942 to 16949.
8.5 AUTOMATIC SAFETYZONE SETTING

Overview
The detector installed in the machine automatically detects the positions of the workpiece holders
mounted on the carriage. The detected values are set in the safety zone setting parameter.
Detector
Workpiece holder(#1 to #4)
Carriage
Fig.8.5 Automatic safetyzone setting
As shown in Fig. 8.5, the SAFZ signal is turned on and off when workpiece holders 1 to 4 pass by the
detector. The safety zone is set according to the status of the SAFZ signal. The position along the Xaxis
when the edge of the SAFZ signal rises is specified as one end of the workpiece holder. The position
when the edge of the SAFZ signal falls is specified as the other end of the workpiece holder.
- 105 -
The coordinate of center of workpiece holder on X-axis is calculated from both end of the workpiece
holder. The witdh of workpiece holeder (parameter Nos.16540 to 16543) is specified by the coordinate
calculated. Moreover, the coordinate of workpiece holder along the Xaxis is specified by using the witdh
of workpiece holeder.
8.5.1 Workpiece Holder Detection Command

G32 X x F f P p Q q ;
G32 is used to specify detection of the positions of workpiece holders. Before this command is issued, the
workpiece holder detector must be made ready.
Specify the command for movement along the Xaxis during detection after address X. The move
direction can be specified as either the positive or negative direction. When the direction is specified as
positive, the detection start position must be at a more negative position than that of workpiece holder 1.
In addition, the distance between the detection start position and workpiece holder 1 must be sufficient
for the velocity to be constant. Workpiece holders are detected in ascending order of the holder numbers,
such as 1, 2, 3, and 4. When the move direction is specified as negative, workpiece holders are detected in
descending order, such as 4, 3, 2, 1. Other conditions are the same as for positive movement. Specify
the feedrate during detection in F (mm/min, 0.01 inch/min) in the same way as that during usual
interpolation.
The positions of the workpiece holders are obtained from the specified machine position when the edge of
the workpiece holder position detector signal (SAFZ) rises of falls. However, the actual machine position
contains an error such as servo delay unlike the specified machine position. Compensate the error using
individual numeric valuers after addresses P and Q. Namely, specify the compensation when the edge of
the SAFZ signal rises with the numeric value after address P, and the compensation when the edge of the
SAFZ signal falls with the numeric value after address Q.
The servo delay can be calculated by the following formulas:

E = T1 F + T 2 F exponential acceleration/deceleration
1
E = T1 F + T 2 F linear acceleration/deceleration
2
E : Servo delay
T1 : Automatic acceleration/deceleration time constant
T2 : Servo time constant
F : Feedrate
The sign for compensation is defined as positive when compensation is made in the opposite direction to
the move direction specified by the detection command.
Actual machine position Detecting position
Workpiece holder position

detector signal
SAFZ<X004.1>
Workpiece holder
P Q
Fig.8.5.1 Workpiece holder position detector signal SAFZ<X004.1> and compensation of detecting position
- 106 -
CAUTION
1 G32 is a singleshot G code.
2 This function is ineffective if reference position return along the Xaxis is not
completed.
3 The positions of the workpiece holders along the Yaxis cannot be detected
automatically.
4 When the execution of the workpiece holder detection command is started, the
specified safety zone is cleared.
5 Before the workpiece holder detection command is issued, the workpiece holder
detector must be made ready with the M function. After the end of detection, the
ready state of the detector must be released.
Mxx ; (Making the workpiece holder detector ready)
G32X ____F ____P ____Q ____ ;
Myy ; (Releasing the ready state of the workpiece holder detector)
6 The error caused by fluctuation in the workpiece holder position detector (SAFZ)
signal, namely, the following detection error may develop:
Detection error = f (mm/min) 8/60 mm
7 As for G32 command and each of the following states, the alarm (PS4872) is
issued.
When M/S/T is specified in the G32 block.
When G32 is commanded during nibbling mode, circular interpolation,
coordinate system rotation or scaling mode.
8 If address P/Q is omitted in the G32 block, the error between coordinates and
actual machine position is calculated by the CNC. The calculation method is as
follows.
P, Q=Esrvo+enc
Where
Esrvo : Delay of the servo system
Enc : Delay of the acceleration/deceleration in the NC
8.5.2 Detecting Workpiece Holder Position Using an External

Signal
Detection method 1
Automatic safety zone setting is enabled when reference position return along the Xaxis is completed
immediately after CNC poweron. After selecting manual reference position return mode, set automatic
safety zone setting request signal SAFRQ to 1. At this time, the workpiece holder position detector
must be ready for operation.
When reference position return has not yet been completed, perform manual reference position return. For
automatic safety zone setting, set the SAFRQ signal to 1 after reference position return along the
Xaxis. Next, enter feed axis direction select signal +X or X. Then, the tool moves along the Xaxis to
position A, set in parameter No. 16535, either at the manual rapid traverse rate or at the feedrate set in
parameter No. 16536.
- 107 -
Detector
Workpiece holder (#1 to #4)
Carriage Carriage
The amount of travel for detecting operation
Position A Xaxis reference position

(Set in parameter No.16535) (Set in parameter No.1250)
Fig.8.5.2 (a) Automatic safty-zone setting:Detection method 1
Once movement along the Xaxis has been completed, the CNC clears the currently set safety zones, then
sets safety zone setting ready signal SAFEXE to 1. Automatic safety zone setting is enabled when the
SAFEXE signal is output.
If feed axis direction select signal +X or X is entered again after the SAFEXE signal has been set to 1,
the tool performs highspeed reference position return along the Xaxis. During highspeed reference
position return, the CNC sets each safety zone at the rising or falling edge of the workpiece holder
position detector signal.
Safety zones are set in order from #1 to #2 to #3 to #4 if movement is made for detection in the positive
direction along the X axis. Safety zones are set in order from #4 to #3 to #2 to #1 if movement is made for
detection in the negative direction along the X axis.
Upon the completion of highspeed reference position return, the SAFEXE signal is set to 0 to end
automatic safety zone setting. After the SAFEXE signal has been confirmed as having been set to 0, the
SAFRQ signal is set to 0.
Signal for selecting manual reference

position return ZRN <Gn043.7>
Mode selection signal

MD1 <Gn043.0>

MD4 <Gn043.2>
Automatic safety zone setting request

Signal SAFRQ <Gn232.5>
Safety zone setting ready signal

SAFEXE <Fn231.6>
Feed axis and direction selection signals

+J,-J <Gn100,Gn102>
Axis moving signals

MV <Fn102> Movement to Highspeed reference position return
position A
Safety zone position detection
Fig.8.5.2 (b) Timing diagram
Detection method 2
After automatic or manual reference position return along the Xaxis, automatic safety zone setting is
enabled when Xaxis reference position return completion signal ZP1 is set to 1. In this case, safety
zones can be set automatically if manual reference position return mode is selected, and the SAFRQ
signal is set to 1. At this time, the workpiece holder position detector must also be ready for operation.
Then, when feed axis direction select signal +X or X is entered, the tool moves along the Xaxis to
position A, set in parameter No. 16535, either at the manual rapid traverse rate or at the feedrate set in
parameter No. 16536. At this time, the CNC clears the currently set safety zones.
- 108 -
During movement to position A, the CNC memorizes the position of one end of each workpiece holder at
the rising edge of the workpiece holder position detector signal.
Upon the completion of movement to position A, the SAFEXE signal is set to 1. If the feed axis
direction select signal +X or X is entered again after the SAFEXE signal has been set to 1, the tool
performs highspeed reference position return along the Xaxis. During highspeed reference position
return, the CNC sets each safety zone by memorizing the position of the other end of each workpiece
holder at the rising edge of the workpiece holder position detector signal.
Safety zones are set in order from #1 to #2 to #3 to #4 if movement is made for detection in the positive
direction along the X axis during highspeed reference position return. Safety zones are set in order from
#4 to #3 to #2 to #1 if movement is made for detection in the negative direction along the X axis during
highspeed reference position return.
Upon the completion of highspeed reference position return, the SAFEXE signal is set to 0 to end
automatic safety zone setting. After the SAFEXE signal has been confirmed as having been set to 0, the
SAFRQ signal is set to 0.
Signal for selecting manual reference

position return ZRN <Gn043.7>

MD1 <Gn043.0>

MD4 <Gn043.2>
Reference position return end signals

ZP <Fn094>
Automatic safety zone setting request

Signal SAFRQ <Gn232.5>
Safety zone setting ready signal

SAFEXE <Fn231.6>
Feed axis and direction selection signals

+J,-J <Gn100,Gn102>
Axis moving signals

MV <Fn102> Movement to Highspeed reference
position A position return
Safety zone position detection
Fig.8.5.2 (c) Timing diagram
Once reference position return along the Xaxis has been completed, the tool can be automatically moved
to the Xaxis reference position to perform subsequent workpiece holder detection operations.
When automatic safety zone setting request signal SAFRQ and feed axis direction select signal +X or X
are entered, the tool performs highspeed reference position return along the Xaxis, starting from the
current position. After checking the ZP1 signal upon the completion of this operation, perform actual
detection.
- 109 -
CAUTION
1 Use bit 2 (ZI0) of parameter No. 16502 to switch between the detection
methods.
2 The position of a workpiece holder on the Yaxis cannot be detected
automatically.
3 To enable the execution of safety zone position detection, set a detection start
position such that the distance between the detection start position and the first
end of the workpiece holder is sufficient for the feedrate to stabilize.
4 If reset is performed during safety zone position detection, repeat the operation
from reference position return along the Xaxis.
5 The purpose of automatic detection is to automatically calculate the central
position of a workpiece holder from the signal transitions. Accordingly, set
workpiece holder width data in parameter Nos. 16540 to 16543 so that safety
zones can be set correctly.
6 If the number of safety zones to be set does not match the detector signal
transition count, during automatic safety zone setting, alarm (DS4871) is issued.
7 When the detector signal makes a transition when position deviation along the
Xaxis during movement for automatic safety zone setting exceeds the allowable
range of values set in the parameters (Nos. 16538 and 16539), alarm (DS4870)
is issued.
8.5.3 Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone

After safety zone values are set automatically, they can be displayed on the safety zone screen as shown
below. With this screen, the user can check whether the set values are valid.
Screen
Type A
Fig.8.5.3 (a) Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone : Type A
- 110 -
Screen
Type B
Fig.8.5.3 (b) Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone : Type B
CAUTION
The display items of type B are as follows:
W : Workpiece holder width
X : Workpiece holder central position relative to the tool center
Y : Workpiece holder tip position relative to the tool center
8.6 SIGNAL
Selection signal for tool area of safety zone SZTS0 to SZTS3<Gn232.0 to Gn232.3>
[Function] These signals are used to select a tool area for safety zone checking. These signals must
be changed while a T code is being read or upon reset of CNC.
[Operation] The table below indicates the correspondence between the SZTS0 to SZTS3 signals and
parameter settings.
Parameter No. for tool area

Tool area SZTS0 SZTS1 SZTS2 SZTS3 Xaxis tool Yaxis tool
size size
1 0 0 0 0 16517 16518
2 1 0 0 0 16519 16520
3 0 1 0 0 16521 16522
4 1 1 0 0 16523 16524
5 0 0 1 0 16525 16526
6 1 0 1 0 16527 16528
7 0 1 1 0 16529 16530
8 1 1 1 0 16531 16532
9 0 0 0 1 16551 16552
10 1 0 0 1 16553 16554
11 0 1 0 1 16555 16556
12 1 1 0 1 16557 16558
- 111 -
In safety zone signal SZT1 to SZT12<Fn240.0 to Fn240.7, Fn241.0 to Fn241.3>

[Function] Each signal notifies the PMC that the corresponding tool area is in a safety zone. For
example, a virtual area which is larger than the selected tool area can be set using the
safety zone tool area select signals (SZTS0 to SZTS3). Thus, the command for
positioning the tool near a workpiece holder is known beforehand, allowing interference
to be avoided by changing the positioning path with the interlock function (for type B).
[Output cond.] When each signal is set to 1, the corresponding tool area is in a safety zone.
Signals SZT1 to SZT12 correspond to tool areas 1 to 12, respectively.
Tool area in which an actual

safety zone check is made
Virtual tool area
Safety zone
Output when the virtual tool

area overlaps a workpiece
holder area
Carriage
Fig.8.6 (a) In safety zone signal
Punch forbidden areaentered signal WDDO<Fn231.7>

[Function] When the type B safety zone check is used, this signal notifies the PMC that the tool has
entered a punch forbidden area.
[Output cond.] See 8.2.2 Type B.
Punch enable signal WDC<Gn232.4>

[Function] When the type B safety zone check is used, this signal instructs the CNC to perform
punching, even if the tool has entered a punch forbidden area, and the WDDO signal is
set to 1.
[Operation] See 8.2.2 Type B.
Workpiece holder detection command SAFZ<X004.1>

[Function] This signal notifies the CNC that the workpiece holder position has been detected with
the automatic safety zone setting function.
[Operation] See 8.5 AUTOMATIC SAFETYZONE SETTING.
Automatic safety zone setting request signal SAFRQ<Gn232.5>

[Function] This signal notifies the CNC that automatic safety zone setting, based on an external
signal, has been performed.
[Operation] See 8.5.2 Detecting Workpiece Holder Position Using an External Signal.
- 112 -
Safety zone setting ready signal SAFEXE<Fn231.6>

[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that the position set in parameter No. 16535 has been
reached during automatic safety zone setting, based on an external signal.
[Output cond.] See 8.5.2 Detecting Workpiece Holder Position Using an External Signal.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SAFZ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn232 SAFRQ WDC SZTS3 SZTS2 SZTS1 SZTS0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn231 WDDO SAFEXE
Fn240 SZT8 SZT7 SZT6 SZT5 SZT4 SZT3 SZT2 SZT1
Fn241 SZT12 SZT11 SZT10 SZT9
NOTE
1 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the SAFZ signals are placed in
X004 shown above.
2 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the SAFZ signals are placed in
WARNING
If the address assigned as signal SAFZ is used by another usage, it may cause
an unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must prevent the
8.7 PARAMETER
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16500 YSF SAT SF0
NOTE

#0 SF0 The safety zone of type:

0: A is used.
1: B is used.
- 113 -
NOTE
When type B is used, punching is inhibited in punching mode and
entry is inhibited in laser mode.
#5 SAT When punching is inhibited in the safety zone, the block in which a T command is
specified is checked:
0: In advance.
1: After the FIN signal to complete the T command has been received.
#7 YSF When a safety zone check is executed, the inhibited area along the Y axis extends from
the values:
0: In the negative direction.
1: In the positive direction.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16501 SZ4 SZ3 SZ2 SZ1

#0 to 3 SFj When a safety zone check is executed, in the #j (j=1 to 3) area,

0: An entry is inhibited.
1: Punching is inhibited.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16502 SOF ZNO SZI GSZ ZIO SZC MDP

#0 MDP On the safety zone setting display,

0: The workpiece coordinate system is indicated.
1: The machine coordinate system is indicated.
#1 SZC On the safety zone setting display, the data for:

0: Any zone can be changed.
1: Those zones to be set automatically (parameter No. 16534) can be changed.
#2 ZIO When the safety zone is automatically set by an external signal, the position of a
workpiece holder is detected according to:
0: The on and off states of the SAFZ signal used to detect the position of a workpiece
holder.
1: The on state of the SAFZ signal used to detect the position of a workpiece holder.
#3 GSZ On the graphic screen, the safety zone is checked according to the position of a workpiece
holder:
0: Specified on the safety zone screen.
1: Specified by graphic parameters.
(On the graphic screen, this check is executed in an area that is not related to the
actual machining check.)
#4 SZI Data set on the safety zone setting display is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
- 114 -
#5 ZNO In the safety zone area setting screen of the safety zone B specification, :
0: Number of zone and other number than number of zone can be inputted.
1: Number of zone can be inputted.
#7 SOF In the safety zone check, tool position compensation is:

0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16504 RTZ SPA

#0 SPA In the case of type A of the safety zone check, when the end point of positioning is in the
safety zone or the tool path is interfered with the safety zone, :
0: An alarm is not given.
1: An alarm is given without moving the axis. (Previous check)
#1 RTZ In the safety zone check, setting area of the circle tool figure is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
16505 Positive X coordinate for safety zone 1
16506 Negative X coordinate for safety zone 1
16507 Y coordinate for safety zone 1

- 115 -
Each set of the parameters specify safety zone 1, 2, 3, or 4.

Safety zone 5, 6, 7, or 8 is specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16930 to 16941.
NOTE
1 Set four safety zones to be arranged sequentially in the order of #1,
#2, #3 and #4 from the origin to positive of the Xaxis.
2 Zeros must be specified for zones which need not be specified.
16517 Size of tool area 1 in the X direction
16518 Size of tool area 1 in the Y direction

(B))
In the safety zone check, each set of the parameters specifies tool area 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,or
8.
Tool area 9, 10, 11, or 12 is specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16551 to 16558.
Nos.16942 to 16949.
- 116 -
NOTE
A tool area is selected by signals SZTS0 to SZTS3 input from a
PMC machine.
16533 Distance between the position detector of the workpiece holder and the punch

The parameter sets the distance between the position detector of the workpiece holder and
punch.
The sign of the value set in the parameter corresponds to the direction the machine travels
along the Xaxis, assuming the punch position as zero.
16534 Number of zones to be detected for automatic setting of a safety zone

[Unit of data] Piece
[Valid data range] 0 to 4(8)
This parameter specifies the number of zones to be detected for automatic setting of a
safety zone by an external signal.
When the safety zone area extension function is specified and bit 4 (SF8) is set to 1, the
safety zone can be set up to eight. In this case, safety zone 5, 6, 7, or 8 is specified by
parameter Nos. 16930 to 16941.
NOTE
1 This parameter must be specified when automatic setting of a
safety zone is executed.
2 When the safety zone area extension function is specified and bit 4
(SF8) is set to 1, the maximum allowable data is extended to 8.
3 When the set parameter is outside the valid data range, the CNC
clamps the internal data to the maximum vlue and minimum value.
16535 Retraction position from the Xaxis reference position for automatic setting of a safety zone

This parameter specifies a clearance from the Xaxis reference position for automatic
setting of a safety zone by means of an external signal.
NOTE
Specify a position that is sufficiently distant to allow the speed at which
the position of a workpiece holder is detected to become stable.
- 117 -
16536 Xaxis rapid traverse rate for automatic setting of a safety zone

[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C)
This parameter specifies an Xaxis rapid traverse rate for automatic setting of a safety
zone by an external signal.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the feedrate along the Xaxis for
automatic detection equals the manual rapid traverse rate (parameter
No. 1424).
16537 Xaxis rapid traverse time constant for automatic setting of a safety zone

[Unit of data] msec
This parameter specifies an Xaxis rapid traverse time constant for the automatic setting
of a safety zone by an external signal.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the Xaxis time constant for
automatic detection equals the time constant for manual rapid traverse
(parameter No. 1620).
16538 Lower limit of position error for movement along the Xaxis for automatic setting of a safety zone
16539 Upper limit of position error for movement along the Xaxis for automatic setting of a safety zone

[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 (8 digit)
These parameters specify the lower and upper limits, for the position error for movement
along the Xaxis, for the automatic setting of a safety zone by an external signal.
NOTE
1 These arameters must be specified for automatic setting of a safety
zone.
2 The values of these parameters must satisfy the following condition:
Parameter No. 16538 < Parameter No. 16539
16540 Width of workpiece holder 1 along the Xaxis for automatic setting of a safety zone
- 118 -

(B))
Each of the parameters specifies the width of a workpiece holder along the Xaxis for the
automatic setting of a safety zone by an external signal.
The parameter values correspond to safety zones 1 to 4, specified in parameters Nos.
16505 to 16516, respectively.
Safety zone 5, 6, 7, or 8 is specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16950 to 16953.
NOTE
When automatic setting is executed, these parameters must be set.
16551 X dimension of tool area 9
16552 Y dimension of tool area 9

(B))
In the safety zone check, each set of the parameters specify tool area 9, 10, 11, or 12.
Tool area 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,or 8 is specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16517 to 16532.
Nos.16942 to 16949.
NOTE
A tool area is selected by signals SZTS0 to SZTS3 input from a PMC
machine.
- 119 -
8.8 ALARM AND MESSAGE

Number Message Contents
DS4800 ZONE : PUNCHING INHIBITED 1 When a safety zone check was executed, a punch command
was pecified in area 1 where punching is inhibited.
DS4810 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 +X When a safety zone check was executed, the machine
moving in the positive X direction entered area 1 into which
entry is inhibited.
DS4811 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 -X When a safety zone check was executed, the machine
moving in the negative X direction entered area 1 into which
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
DS4830 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 +Y When a safety zone check was executed, the machine
moving in the positive Y direction entered area 1 into which
entry is inhibited.
DS4831 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 -Y When a safety zone check was executed, the machine
moving in the negative Y direction entered area 1 into which
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
- 120 -

entry is inhibited.
DS4870 AUTO SETTING FEED ERROR The feed rate of safety zone auto setting is other than the
parameter value (No. 16538, No. 16539).
DS4871 AUTO SETTING PIECES ERROR In safety zone auto setting, the safety zone pieces are not
correct. Or the osition detector has gone wrong, please tell
your machine tool builder.
PS4872 AUTO SETTING COMMAND ERROR M code, S code or T code is specified with safety zone auto
setting ommand (G32).
G32 is specified in the nibbling mode, in the cutter
compensation, in he rotation mode or the scaling mode.
- 121 -
9.SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION B-64623EN/01
9 SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION

Chapter 9, SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION, consists of the following sections:
9.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................................122

9.2 FUNCTION.......................................................................................................................................122
9.3 SIGNAL ..........................................................................................................................................123
9.4 PARAMETER...................................................................................................................................124
9.5 ALARM AND MESSAGE ...............................................................................................................127
9.1 OVERVIEW
This optional function extends the safety zone check function as follows:
<1> Extends the safety zone check areas: Up to 8
<2> Extends the safety zone tool areas: Up to 16
<3> Adds interference safety zone area signals (DO signals): Fn228, Fn238
<4> Inproves the automatic safetyzone setting
9.2 FUNCTION
9.2.1 Extending Safety Zone Check Areas

The following can be specified for up to eight safety zones. For details of the following, see Chapter
8, SAFETY ZONE CHECK.
Safety zone check type A

If punching is specified in the punch forbidden area of a safety zone, the previous check function gives an
alarm. If a move command brings the tool into the approach forbidden area of the safety zone, the axial
movement stops, and an alarm is given.
Safety zone check type B

All the safety zones are handled as punch forbidden areas. If the tool enters the safety zone, the
punchforbidden areaentered signal WDDO is output after positioning.
Automatic safetyzone setting

Position detection by the G32 command or an external signal is enabled.
Safety zone setting screen

The safety zone setting screen shows safety zones #1 to #8. Up to eight zones can be input.
Workpiece holder interference avoidance function type A

If the tool area interferes with the workpiece holder area, the tool escape signal WHAL is output, and
positioning is carried out at the same time. The PMC carries out the escape sequence with the interlock
signal, tool escape signal WHAL, and tool escape completion signal WHALC.
Workpiece holder interference avoidance function type B

If the tool area interferes with the workpiece holder area, the CNC automatically performs the avoidance
operation.
- 122 -
B-64623EN/01 9.SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION
Program check (machine lock operation)

The safety zone check function is enabled during a program check.
Graphic simulation
The safety zone check function is enabled during graphic simulation. However, safety zones #5 to #8
cannot be displayed.
Window function
To read and write extended safety zones and tool areas with a software application program, use the
parameter read/write function provided in the application.
9.2.2 Extending Safety Zone Tool Areas

Up to 16 tool areas can be selected.
Tool selection signals and in safety zone signals

For an extended tool selection, tool selection signals SZTS0 to SZTS3 <Gn232.0 to Gn232.3> are used.
The in safety zone signals are output to SZT13 to SZT16 <Fn238.4 to Fn238.7>. For details, see Section
9.3, SIGNAL.
Safety zone setting screen

The data of 16 selectable tool areas can be displayed and specified.
9.2.3 Interference Safety Zone Area Signals <Fn228>

This signal notifies the PMC of the safety zone in which a selected tool enters. For details, see Section
9.3, SIGNAL.
9.2.4 Improving the Automatic Safetyzone Setting

The conventional automatic safetyzone setting function automatically sets a safety zone according to the
travel direction at the position detection of the workpiece holder. If eight areas are used with the safety
zone area extension function, the safety zones are always automatically and successively specified with
the mechanical position relationship of #n < #(n + 1), starting from #1, irrespective of the travel direction
at the position detection of the workpiece holder.
This function is enabled if the SF8 bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 16503) is set to 1.
9.3 SIGNAL
Safety zone interference area signals SZN1 to SZN8<Fn228.0 to Fn228.7>
[Function] This signal tells the safety zone in which the selected tool enters.
[Output cond.] The bit corresponding to the zone the tool enters goes 1. SZN1, SZN2, and so on
correspond to safety zones #1, #2, and so on respectively.
In safety zone signals SZT13 to SZT16<Fn238.4 to Fn238.7>

[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that the corresponding tool area (13 to 16) enters a safety
zone.
- 123 -
[Output cond.] When each signal is set to 1, the corresponding tool area (13 to 16) is in a safety zone.
Signals SZT13 to SZT16 correspond to tool areas 13 to 16, respectively.
For tool areas 1 to 12, see the descriptions of F0240 and F0241.
Safety zone tool area select signals SZTS0 to SZTS3<Gn232.0 to Gn232.3>

[Function] This signal selects a tool area for a safety zone check. This signal must be changed during
the reading of a T code or while the CNC is in the reset state.
[Operation] The table below shows the relationships between the signals SZST0 to SZST3 and the
parameter settings.
Parameter No. for tool area

Tool area SZTS0 SZTS1 SZTS2 SZTS3 Xaxis tool Yaxis tool
size size
1 0 0 0 0 16517 16518
2 1 0 0 0 16519 16520
3 0 1 0 0 16521 16522
4 1 1 0 0 16523 16524
5 0 0 1 0 16525 16526
6 1 0 1 0 16527 16528
7 0 1 1 0 16529 16530
8 1 1 1 0 16531 16532
9 0 0 0 1 16551 16552
10 1 0 0 1 16553 16554
11 0 1 0 1 16555 16556
12 1 1 0 1 16557 16558
13 0 0 1 1 16942 16943
14 1 0 1 1 16944 16945
15 0 1 1 1 16946 16947
16 1 1 1 1 16948 16949
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn232 SZTS3 SZTS2 SZTS1 SZTS0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn228 SZN8 SZN7 SZN6 SZN5 SZN4 SZN3 SZN2 SZN1
9.4 PARAMETER
16501 SZ8 SZ7 SZ6 SZ5 SZ4 SZ3 SZ2 SZ1

#0 to 7 SFj When a safety zone check is executed, in the #j (j=1 to 8) area,

0: An entry is inhibited.
1: Punching is inhibited.
- 124 -
NOTE
1 To use SZ5 to SZ8, the safety zone area extension function is
necessary.
2 When type B of safety zone check is used, this parameter is
disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16503 T16 SF8

#4 SF8 The number of safety zones to be used is:

0: Up to 4.
1: Up to 8.
NOTE
This parameter is valid if the safety zone area extension function is
specified.
#5 T16 The number of tool areas to be used is:

0: Up to 12.
1: Up to 16.
NOTE
This parameter is valid if the safety zone area extension function is
specified.
16534 Number of zones to be detected for automatic setting of a safety zone

[Unit of data] Piece
[Valid data range] 0 to 4(8)
This parameter specifies the number of zones to be detected for automatic setting of a
safety zone by an external signal.
NOTE
1 This parameter must be specified when automatic setting of a safety
zone is executed.
(SF8) is set to 1, the maximum allowable data is extended to 8.
3 When the set parameter is outside the valid data range, the CNC
clamps the internal data to the maximum vlue and minimum value.
- 125 -

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (A))
Each set of the parameters specify safety zone 5, 6, 7, or 8.

Safety zone 1, 2, 3, or 4 are specified by setting each set of the parameters among Nos.
16505 to 16516.
NOTE
(SF8) is set to 1, these parameters are enabled.
2 Set four safety zones to be arranged sequentially in the order of #5,
#6, #7 and #8 from the origin to positive of the Xaxis.

- 126 -
[Valid data range] 0 or Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
In the safety zone check, each set of the parameters specify tool area 13, 14, 15, or 16.
Tool area 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,or 8 are specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16517 to 16532.
Tool area 9, 10, 11, or 12 are specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16551 to 16558.
NOTE
2 A tool area is selected by signals SZTS0 to SZTS3 input from a PMC
machine.

[Valid data range] 0 or Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (Refer to the standard parameter setting
table (B))
Each of the parameters specifies the width of a workpiece holder along the Xaxis for the
automatic setting of a safety zone by an external signal.
The parameter values correspond to safety zones 5 to 8, specified in parameter Nos.
16930 to 16941, respectively.
Safety zone 1, 2, 3, or 4 are specified by setting each set of the parameters among Nos.
16540 to 16543.
NOTE
2 When automatic setting is executed, these parameters must be set.
9.5 ALARM AND MESSAGE

was specified in area 5 where punching is inhibited.
- 127 -

entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
entry is inhibited.
- 128 -
B-64623EN/01 10.WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
10 WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE

AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
Chapter 10, WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE FUNCTION, consists of the
following sections:
10.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................................129

10.2 INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE METHODS ................................................................................130
10.2 TOOL/WORKPIECE HOLDER AREAS.........................................................................................135
10.3 SIGNAL ..........................................................................................................................................135
10.4 PARAMETER...................................................................................................................................136
10.5 NOTE ..........................................................................................................................................138
10.1 OVERVIEW
If the tool is positioned to the normal height (for punching), as shown in Fig.10.1, the tool will interfere
with the workpiece holder when the workpiece holder moves into the turret.
By means of this function, the CNC monitors the positions of the tool and workpiece holder to avoid
interference between the workpiece holder and tool.
Tool escape status
Tool status in punching
Upper Turret
Workpiece holder
Lower Turret
Fig.10.1 Tool escape position
By setting bit 6 (ACZ) of parameter No. 16502, the user can select either of two interference avoidance
methods:
<1> Type A: Interference is avoided by the PMC, by using the DI/DO signals.
<2> Type B: Interference is automatically avoided by the CNC.
The CNC observes the position of the tool and the work holder to avoid interference.
- 129 -
10.WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE FUNCTION B-64623EN/01
10.2 INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE METHODS
10.2.1 Type A
Specification
Setting bit 6 (ACZ) of parameter No.16502 to 0 allows you to use type A of interference avoidance.
If the CNC makes a check to find the positioning path before the start of positioning, and the check
reveals interference between the tool area and workpiece holder area, the CNC sets tool escape signal
WHAL <Fn231.5>, sent to the PMC, to 1, and simultaneously starts positioning.
When the WHAL signal is received, the PMC uses the axis interlock signal to stop tool movement along
the axes. Then, the PMC retracts the tool to a position (tool escape position shown in Fig.10.1) where it
does not interfere with the workpiece holder. After the completion of an escape operation, the PMC sets
tool escape completion signal WHALC <Gn232.7> to 1, and also releases the all axes interlock signal
*IT to restart positioning.
When the WHALC signal is received, the CNC sets the WHAL signal to 0.
Block start Block end
Tool escape signal

WHAL <Fn231.5>
All axes interlock signal

*IT <Gn008.0>
Escape operation
Tool escape completion signal

WHALC <Gn232.7>
Axis movement
Fig.10.2.1 (a) Timing diagram
NOTE
When tool escape signal WHAL<Fn231.5> is set to 1, the axis is continued
moving after All axes interlock signal *IT<Gn008.0> is set to 1.
In nibbling operation
If, during nibbling, the tool enters an interference area during the next positioning operation, press
activation signal PF <Y004.2> and continuous press activation inprogress signal NBL <Y004.1> are set
to 0 when press activation stop signal *PE <X004.7> for the current punching operation is set to 0.
Moreover, the WHAL signal is set to 1 when punching completion signal *NFIN <X004.6> for the
continuous press is set to 0. Then, as in the case where 1cycle press select signal CPS <Gn230.2> is
set to 1, 1cycle punch operation is performed until the tool moves out of the interference area.
- 130 -
Nibbling operation 1cycle press operation

Pofitioning to
Positioning Positioning Positioning
interference area
Nibbling signal
NBL <Y004.1>
Press start signal

PF <Y004.2>
Press stop signal
*PE <X004.7>
*NFIN <X004.6>
Tool escape signal
WHAL <Fn231.5>
Em ergency stop signals

*IT <Gn008.0>
Escape operation
Tool escape completion signal

WHALC <Gn232.7>
Fig.10.2.1 (b) Timing diagram (In nibbling operation)
CAUTION
1 When type A of interference avoidance is used, the CNC controls theWHAL
signal only. Actually, interference is avoided by the PMC.
2 The value of parameter No.16559 and No. 16560 are added to the tool area
width when interference is checked.
When type B of interference avoidance is used, the WHAL signal and the
WHALC signal is enabled.
3 Since specification of type A may depending upon the machine tool builder, refer
to the machine tool builders manual without fail.
Check of interference area

The CNC judges whther the interference between the workpiece holder and the tool is happened by the
rectangular area that is caluculated from the tool area of the block start and block end. When the area for
work piece holder interfere with the rectangular area in Fig.10.2.1 (c), The CNC judges the interference
between the workpiece holder and the tool is happened.
When manual operation is performed, the WHAL signal is set to 1 only after the tool enters an
interference area.
- 131 -
End position
interference area
Workpiece holder
Tool figure area

Area for workpiece holder
Y
Start position
X
Tool
Fig.10.2.1 (c) interference area
NOTE
See also Section 10.2.2.
10.2.2 Type B
Specification
Setting bit 6 (ACZ) of parameter No. 16502 to 1 allows you to use type B of interference avoidance.
If, during automatic operation, a positioning operation may cause the tool area to interfere with the
workpiece holder area, this function first moves the tool along a noninterfering axis, which may be
either the Xaxis orYaxis, then moves the tool along the other axis, thus preventing the occurrence of
interference.
This avoidance operation is performed only when the avoid operation signal ACZEXE <Gn232.6> is set
to 1. So, if the tool does not interfere with the workpiece holder, normal positioning can be used for
machining by setting the ACZEXE signal to 0.
Usual tool path by positioning End position
Tool path by avoidance

operation
Start position
Fig.10.2.2 (a) Tool path by avoidance operation
- 132 -
Determination of whether to perform avoidance operation

Avoidance operation is performed in all cases except those described below.
(1) When the tool does not move along the Xaxis
Fig.10.2.2 (b) Determination of whether to perform avoidance operation (1)
(2) When the start and end points of movement along the Yaxis are above the Y area of the workpiece
holders
Fig.10.2.2 (c) Determination of whether to perform avoidance operation (2)
- 133 -
(3) When the tool does not cross the X area of a workpiece holder for movement along the Xaxis
Fig.10.2.2 (d) Determination of whether to perform avoidance operation (3)
When both the start and end points on the Yaxis are in the Y area of the workpiece holders, the
following avoidance operation is performed:
Usual tool path by positioning

B C
operation
dAvoidance operation offset

(parameter No. 16561)
Y area of the workpiece

holders
Y
D: End position
AStart position
Fig.10.2.2 (e) Tool path by avoidance operation
The avoidance operation modifies the positioning path from A to D to that from A to B to C to D.
<1> Amount of travel between A and B on the Yaxis
= (workpiece holder position) + (tool area/2) + d (current position A)
d: Avoidance operation offset (parameter No. 16561)
<2> Amount of travel between B and C along the Xaxis = (X command value)
<3> Amount of travel between C and D along the Yaxis
= (Y command position D) (current position C)
CAUTION
If feed hold signal *SP <Gn008.5> is set to 0 during an avoidance operation,
the tool stops upon the completion of the avoidance operation.
- 134 -
10.3 TOOL/WORKPIECE HOLDER AREAS

(1) The workpiece holder area (parameter Nos. 16505 to 16516) of the safety zone function is used.
(2) The tool area (parameter Nos. 16517 to 16532, 16551 to 16558) of the safety zone function is used.
(3) When the WHAL signal <Fn231.5> is output, the tool area can be offset (parameter Nos. 16559,
16560).
10.4 SIGNAL
Avoidance operation signal ACZEXE<Gn232.6>
[Function] This signal specifies whether to perform avoidance operation according to the type B
specification.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, avoidance operation is performed as part of a positioning
operation that may cause the tool to interfere with the workpiece holder.
Tool escape completion signal WHALC<Gn232.7>

[Function] This signal posts the completion of tool escape.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the WHAL signal is set to 0.
Tool escape signal WHAL<Fn231.5>

[Function] This signal posts notification that the tool may interfere with the workpiece holder during
tool positioning.
[Output cond] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases:
(1) When, during automatic operation, a positioning operation that may cause the tool to
interfere with the workpiece holder is started
(2) When, during manual operation, the tool enters the interference area of a workpiece
holder
This signal is set to 0 in the following cases:
(1) When the WHALC signal, set to 1, is received
(2) In the reset state
CAUTION
When, during manual operation, the tool enters the interference
area of a workpiece holder and the tool escape completion signal
WHALC is set to 1, the tool escape signal WHAL is set to 0 after
the tool is moved outside the interference area.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn232 WHALC ACZEXE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn231 WHAL
- 135 -
10.5 PARAMERER
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16502 ACZ

#6 ACZ The function used to prevent interference between workpiece holders of:
0: Type A is used.
1: Type B is used.
Compensation width of tool area along the Xaxis for the workpiece holder interference avoidance
16559
function
Compensation width of tool area along the Yaxis for the workpiece holder interference avoidance
16560
function

Each of the parameters is specified to a margin for the tool area (parameter Nos. 16517 to
16532, Nos. 16551 to 16558, Nos. 16942 to 16949) during the workpiece holder
interference avoidance function. The parameter value is added to the tool area width
when the interference between the tool area and the workpiece holders is checked to
output the WHAL signal <Fn231.5>.
NOTE
When the type B of interference avoidanceis used, this parameter
is not related to the interference avoidance.
- 136 -
Compensation value used by the function used to prevent interference
16561
between workpiece holders

This parameter specifies a compensation value for retraction along the Yaxis when the
function used to prevent interference between workpiece holders of type B is used.

operation
dSetting value
Workpiece
holder End position
Start position
Rapid traverse rate when the interference is avoided while workpiece holder interference avoidance
16579
function

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C)
This parameter sets the rapid traverse rate when the interference is avoided while
workpiece holder interference avoidance function is used.
This parameter is enabled for the X and Y axes.
NOTE
1 This parameter is enabled in the block to move on the Y-axis away
from workpiece holder while workpiece holder interference
avoidance.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, Rapid traverse rate when the
interference is avoided is set rapid traverse rate for each axis
(parameter No.1420).
Rapid traverse time constant when the interference is avoided while workpiece holder interference
16580
avoidance function

[Unit of data] msec
This parameter sets the rapid traverse time constant when the interference is avoided
while workpiece holder interference avoidance function is nsed.
- 137 -
This parameter is enabled for the X and Y axes.
NOTE
1 This parameter is enabled in the block to move on the Y-axis away
from workpiece holder while workpiece holder interference
avoidance.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, Rapid traverse rate when the
interference is avoided is set Time constant used for linear
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis (parameter
No.1620).
10.6 NOTE
NOTE
1 This function is optional.
2 The optional safety zone function must be specified at the same time.
3 The operation of this function is based on the safety zone function. So, see the
specification of the safety zone function.
4 When specification is the type B, even if the positioning path is interference in a
punch forbidden area by press-off command (G70), avoidance operation is
performed.
5 Signals of type A can also be used when the type B specification is selected.
- 138 -
B-64623EN/01 11.CONTROL FUNCTION
11 CONTROL FUNCTION
Chapter 11, CONTROL FUNCTION, consists of the following sections:
11.1 FEED HOLD SIGNAL B/FEED HOLD LAMP SIGNAL B ...........................................................139

11.2 SWITCHING THE PUNCHING AND LASER MODES................................................................140
11.3 RAPID TRAVERSE TIME CONSTANT OVERRIDE ...................................................................142
11.4 SERVO PARAMETER SWITCHING FUNCTION ........................................................................143
11.5 NIBBLING PARAMETER SWITCHING CONTROL USING EXTERNAL SIGNALS ..............147
11.6 RAM-AXIS CONTROL ...................................................................................................................149
11.1 FEED HOLD SIGNAL B/FEED HOLD LAMP SIGNAL B

Signal
Feed hold signal B *SPR<X008.5>
[Function] This signal suspends automatic operation.
[Operation] This signal has the same effect as feed hold signal *SP <Gn008.5>. The CNC reads the
input data directly, however, not via the PMC. This signal is valid when bit 4 (SPR) of
parameter No. 16002 is set to 1.
Feed hold lamp signal B SPRL<Fn230.4>

[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that automatic operation has been suspended.
[Output cond.] This signal has the same effect as feed hold lamp signal SPL <Fn000.4>. This signal,
however, is set to 1 when automatic operation is suspended by feed hold signal B
(*SPR).
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X008 *SPR
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn230 SPRL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16002 SPR

#4 SPR The *SPR signal to halt automatic oparation B is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
- 139 -
11.CONTROL FUNCTION B-64623EN/01
11.2 SWITCHING THE PUNCHING AND LASER MODES

Overview
The punch mode and laser mode can be switched by specifying M codes in parameters. An M code is
specified in the first block for punching and for laser machining in a machining program. This will
improve processing precision in the interpolation mode of the laser mode. In the laser mode, punching is
not performed even in blocks where positioning is done by rapid traverse along the X and Y axes. Manual
punching, however, is possible. Note that pattern commands such as G26 and nibbling commands such as
G68 cannot be specified. (These commands cause alarm (PS4630).)
Example
G92 X1000. Y800. ;
M 40 ;
G72 X200. Y200. ; Punch mode
G26 I50. J0 K10. T101 ;
M 41 ;
G90 G00 X100. Y100. ;
G01 X300. F300 ; Laser mode
Y300. ;
X100. ;
Y100. ;
M 40 ;
G28 M 30
WARNING
1 The punching mode and laser mode can be switched only when ALA in bit 0 of
parameter No. 16242 is set to 1.
2 Set the M code to the parameter (No. 16244, No. 16245).
3 The punch mode or the laser mode is entered immediately after the power is
turned on or the system is reset. (Laser mode is entered when bit 5 (RLM) of
parameter No. 16240 is set.)
4 The M codes for switching the punch and laser modes must be specified in a
single block.
Signal
Laser mode set signal LASMOD<Fn239.6>
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that laser mode is set.
[Output cond.] When laser mode is set, this signal is set to 1. When punch mode is set, this signal is set
to 0.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn239 LASMOD
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16240 RLM RPL
NOTE
- 140 -
#4 RPL When the system is reset, the punch mode and laser mode:
0: Can be switched by bit 5 (RLM) of parameter No.16240.
1: Can not be switched.
#5 RLM When the power is turned on or in the clear status, the machine is set in the:
0: Punch mode.
1: Laser mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16241 ILM

#3 ILM In a block other than cutting feed blocks or blocks between the two cutting feed blocks
when the laser mode is selected, the next block is started:
0: After the following is checked: The specified speed is reduced to zero and the
machine reaches the specified position. (A position check is carried out.)
1: After checking that the specified speed is reduced to zero.(No position check is
carried out.)
The parameters are validated when bit 0 (ALA) of parameter No. 16242 is set to 1.
In punching mode, the NCI bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 1601) is valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16242 ALA
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 ALA Switching between the punch mode and laser mode is:
0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
16244 M code for setting the punch mode
16245 M code for setting te leser mode

Each of the parameters set the M code for setting the punch mode or leser mode.
The parameters are validated when bit 0 (ALA) of parameter No. 16242 is set to 1.
- 141 -
Alarm and message

PS4630 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LASER In the laser mode, a nibbling command or pattern command
MODE was specified.
11.3 RAPID TRAVERSE TIME CONSTANT OVERRIDE

Overview
An override can be applied to the rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the X
and Yaxes. The override can be selected within a range of 1 to 100%, in 1% steps. This function allows
the user to adjust the time constant as follows: First, set the time constant corresponding to the maximum
acceleration/deceleration, then apply an override according to the weight of the workpiece to be machined,
thus obtaining the optimum time constant.
Finer adjustment is possible when this function is used together with that for setting the time constant to
one of seven levels according to the positioning distance.
Rapid traverse positioning
Speed
Time
T
1
T
override
Fig.11.3 (a) Rapid traverse time constant override
Constant positioning time control
Speed
Time
T
1
T
Override
Fig.11.3 (b) Rapid traverse time constant override in constant positioning time control
- 142 -
Signal
Rapid traverse time constant override signals TMOV0 to TMOV6<Gn241.0 to .6>
[Function] Applies an override to the rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration time constant
within a range of 1 to 100%, in 1% steps.
[Operation] An override value specified with seven binary code signals is applied to the rapid traverse
linear acceleration/deceleration time constant. If 0% or 101% to 127% is specified, the
override is assumed to be 100%.
Example: To specify 10%: binary value = 0001010
An override is applied based on those states of the override signals existing when the
program block information is read and stored into the buffer. If the override signals are
changed for the block that is currently being executed, therefore, the override is not
effective for that block.
The PF signal is output at a timing based on the PF output timer, regardless of the
override value.
Siganal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn241 TMOV6 TMOV5 TMOV4 TMOV3 TMOV2 TMOV1 TMOV0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16053 NVG FDG BLN ROM NOV TMO

#0 TMO Override for a linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for rapid traverse is:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
11.4 SERVO PARAMETER SWITCHING FUNCTION

Overview
The following functions can be used in highspeed positioning control for the table axes (X and
Yaxes):
1. Velocity loop gain switching according to the positioning distance (seven levels)
2. Nibbling constant positioning time control (three levels)
3. Position gain switching speed and PI/IP control selection
11.4.1 Velocity Loop Gain Switching According to the Positioning

Distance
During automatic operation, the velocity loop gains (parameters No. 2043 and No. 2044) for the X and
Yaxes can be set to one of seven levels, according to the positioning distance, specified with parameters
(No.6136 to No.6138, No.11230 to No.11232). Upon a reset, the standard parameter settings (No. 2043
and No. 2044) are selected.
- 143 -
11.4.2 Nibbling Constant Positioning Time Control (Three Levels)

In addition to conventional constant positioning time control, threelevel constant positioning time
control according to the nibbling pitch can be applied in nibbling mode. The PF output timer, the position
gain, and the velocity loop gains described in Section 11.4.1 can also be set to one of three levels. This
function is valid only for the X and Yaxes.
11.4.3 Position Gain Switching Speed and PI/IP Control Selection

During automatic operation, the position gain switching speed and whether PI or IP control is used can be
selected separately for ordinary machining mode and nibbling mode. Upon a reset, the standard parameter
settings (No. 2003 bit 3 and No. 2028) are selected. This function is valid only for the X and Yaxes.
11.4.4 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6131 OADx

[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
#0 OADx The function for positioning by optimum acceleration

0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
6136 Distance D1 for level 1 of positioning by optimum acceleration for each axis
11230 Distance to the 4th step in positioning by optimum acceleration for each axis D4
[Input type]] Parameter input

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
(B))
When using the function of Positioning by Optimum Accelerations, this parameter sets
the positioning distance foreach axis.
- 144 -
NOTE
1 To use this parameter, set bit 0 (OADx) of parameter No. 6131 to
1.
2 If 0 is set in all of parameters Nos. 6136 to 6138 and 11230 to
11232, this function is disabled.
3 The settings must satisfy the following: D1<D2<D3<D4<D5<D6.
4 Switching in up to seven steps is possible. When up to four steps
are used, for example, set parameters so that expression
D1<D2<D3 is satisfied, and set a maximum value (such as
+999999.999 mm) for D4, D5, and D6.
5 In parameters Nos. 6136 to 6138 and 11230 to 11232, set a
distance for each axis. Block lengths must not be specified in these
parameters.
16828 Velocity loop integral gain for first stage
16829 Velocity loop integral gain for second stage
16830 Velocity loop integral gain for third stage
16831 Velocity loop integral gain for fourth stage
16832 Velocity loop integral gain for fifth stage
16833 Velocity loop integral gain for sixth stage
16834 Velocity loop integral gain for seventh stage

velocity loop integral gains. (Equivalent to parameter No. 2043)
NOTE
1 These parameters are valid when bit 5 (VGC) of parameter No.
16051 is set to 1.
16835 Velocity loop proportional gain for first stage
16836 Velocity loop proportional gain for second stage
16837 Velocity loop proportional gain for third stage
16838 Velocity loop proportional gain for fourth stage
16839 Velocity loop proportional gain for fifth stage
16840 Velocity loop proportional gain for sixth stage
- 145 -
16841 Velocity loop proportional gain for seventh stage

velocity loop proportional gains. (Equivalent to parameter No. 2044)
NOTE
16051 is set to 1.
16842 Limit speed for enabling position gain switching (ordinary machining)
16843 Limit speed for enabling position gain switching (nibbling)

[Unit of data] When a rotation motor is used : 0.01min-1
When a linear motor is used : 0.01mm/min
Set the maximum speed at which the position gain is doubled during automatic operation
in ordinary machining mode and nibbling mode. (Equivalent to parameter No. 2028)
NOTE
16051 is set to 1 and either or both bit 0 (OADx) of parameter
No.6131 and bit 2 (N3S) of parameter No.16050 are set to 1.
- 146 -
11.5 NIBBLING PARAMETER SWITCHING CONTROL USING

EXTERNAL SIGNALS
Overview
For nibbling commands, constant positioning time control and parameterselection for the X and Yaxes
are performed at one of three levelsaccording to the nibbling pitch. This function, however, performs
threelevel switching based on external signals SNP<Gn230.6> and SNP2<Gn231.2>.
Specifications
Correspondence between external signals and parameters
The following table lists the correspondence between the external signals and parameters:
Nomal (For
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
reference)
SNP<Gn0230.6> 0 1 1 0
SNP2<Gn0231.2> 1 1 0 0
Nibbling pitch (p) No.16800 No.16801 No.16190 No.16186
Positioning time (X-axis) No.16804 No.16805 No.16806
Positioning time (Y-axis) No.16807 No.16808 No.16809
PF output time prior to end of No.16810 No.16811 No.16812 No.16012
first stage positioning (X-axis)
PF output time prior to end of No.16813 No.16814 No.16815 No.16012
first stage positioning (Y-axis)
Servo loop gain (X-axis) No.16816 No.16817 No.16818 No.1825
(*1)
Servo loop gain (Y-axis) No.16819 No.16820 No.16821 No.1825
(*1)
Velocity loop integral gain X-axis in No.16822 X-axis in No.16823 X-axis in No.16824 No.2043
(X-axis) (*2)
Velocity loop integral gain Y-axis in No.16822 Y-axis in No.16823 Y-axis in No.16824 No.2043
(Y-axis) (*2)
Velocity loop proportional gain X-axis in No.16825 X-axis in No.16826 X-axis in No.16827 No.2044
(X-axis) (*2)
Velocity loop proportional gain Y-axis in No.16825 Y-axis in No.16826 Y-axis in No.16827 No.2044
(Y-axis) (*2)
(*1) These parameters are valid when bit 0 (ILG) of parameter No. 6132 is set to 1.
(*2) These parameters are valid when bit 5 (VGC) of parameter No. 16051 is set to 1.
Table11.5 (a) Nibblong parameter switching using external signals
NOTE
1 To apply control for switching the above parameters, bit 2 (N3S) of parameter
No. 16050 and bit 0(ILG) of parameter No.6132 and bit 5 (VGC) of parameter
No. 16051 must be set.
2 Threelevel selection can also be performed according to the nibbling pitch by
setting bit 5 (NPS) of parameter No. 16181 to 1.
Nibbling pitch check

An alarm is issued if a pitch specified in the program exceeds the value specified with the nibbling pitch
(p), selected using signals SNP and SNP2.
- 147 -
Rapid traverse override

Rapid traverse override (ROV1 and ROV2) and rapid traverse time constant override (TMOV0 to
TMOV6) are enabled for nibbling constant positioning time control, if bits 0 (TMO) and 1 (NOV) of
parameter No. 16053 are set accordingly.
Signal
Nibbling twolevel switching signals SNP<Gn230.6>
Nibbling threelevel switching signals SNP2<Gn231.2>
[Function] For a nibbling command, switches the parameters for the X and Yaxes to one of three
levels.
[Operation] Please refer to above "Specifications" for details.
These signals operate based on the states of the signals existing when the program block
information is read and stored into the buffer. Switch, therefore, the signals using an M
code in nibbling mode or an M code which masks buffering.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn230 SNP
Gn231 SNP2
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16181 NPS SN2

#4 SN2 Nibbling parameter switching control using an external signal is:

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 2 (N3S) of parameter No. 16050 is
set to 1.
2 When using this parameter, set bit 1 (NPC) of parameter No.
16181 to 0.
#5 NPS While nibbling parameter switching control using an external signal is applied, stage
switching is:
0: Performed according to the state of the external signal
1: Performed according to the nibbling pitch
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 4 (SN2) of parameter No. 16181 is
set to 1.
2 The nibbling pitch is checked by the state of signal SNP and SNP2.
- 148 -
11.6 RAM-AXIS CONTROL

Overview
The CNC controls RAM-axis motion and table motion by using RAM-axis control.
Making the RAM-axis motion patterns allows the press motion to which RAM-axis and the table axes
(X and Yaxes) closely relate, such as press operation holding sound and forming.
11.6.1 RAM-axis Setting

Overview
The CNC cannot move RAM-axis by program command. RAM-axis moves automatically at the end of
the block executing 1-cycle press by setting RAM-axis and the RAM-axis motion patterns.
Setting
When bit 0 (RAX) of parameter No.16760 is set to 1, RAM-axis is available by setting the axis number of
RAM-axis in the parameter No.16767. Moreover, please set either A, B, U, V, and W to RAM-axis name.
NOTE
When RAM-axis is assumed to be rotary axis, setting the following parameter so
that displayed values for absolute coordinate, machine coordinate, and relative
coordinate are rounded in 0 to 360.
Set bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 to 1.
Set bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter No. 1006 to 0.
Set bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1.
Set bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1.
Setting RAM-axis motion pattern

RAM-axis motion pattern should be set the PMC expanded non-volatile memory or C language executor
variable area (Selection by bit 0 (CSR) of parameter No. 16789). After Setting the RAM-axis motion
patterns, the CNC read specified the RAM-axis motion patterns when the punching is commanded.
Using the FOCAS2 function allows writing the data into the PMC expanded non-volatile memory.
Specifying the address by the application software allows writing the data into C language executor
variable area.
PMC Expanded Nonvolatile Memory

or
C language executor variable area
Application CNC
Write
software
by using
FOCAS2 etc. Read
Setting of Interpolation of
Ram Axis Ram Axis Motion
Motion Pattern
Ram Axis
Motion Pattern
Fig.11.6 (a) Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern
- 149 -
RAM-axis motion pattern

One RAM-axis motion pattern consists of some segments. The feedrate, the stop position, and the stop
time after the movement is completed are set to each segment data.
Specified Motion
Ram Axis Feedrate
F3 Motion after Acc/Dec
F1
F4
F2
L1 L2 L3 L4
H2
Time
Segment-1 Segment -2 Segment -3 Segment -4
Fig.11.6 (b) RAM-axis motion pattern
On the above chart, L1, L2, L3 are the incremental motions for each segment-1, -2, -3 respectively. CNC
calculates each Ln from commanded the RAM-axis motion pattern. And F1, F2, F3 are the feedrates of
each segment. Moreover, a dwell (Hn) after the segment motion can be specified if required.
The CNC interpolates the RAM-axis motion based on the specified data that is federate and amount of
movement. Moreover, time constant used for the acceleration /deceleration in the rapid traverse is set on
the parameter No. 1620 similar to the case for the table axes.
- 150 -
Format of RAM-axis motion pattern

RAM-axis motion pattern should be written into the momory for the consecutive address data. Moreover,
RAM-axis motion pattern of each T code and M code should be stored in the memory.
The format of the whole RAM-axis motion patterns is as follows.
Parameter (No.16768) = Top address of RAM-axis Motion Pattern

Address Data
+0 Number of Motion Patterns
+2 (Reserved)
+4 (Reserved)
+8 Bottom dead center
+12 RAM-axis Start Position-1 (Up limit)
+16 RAM-axis Start Position-2 (Top dead center)
+20 RAM-axis Start Position-3 (2nd top dead center)
+24 Number of Segment in Motion Pattern-1
+28 Top Address of Motion Pattern-1
:
Group of Motion Pattern-1 data
Address Data
+0 Feedrate of Segment-1 (F1)
+4 Dwell Time of Segment-1(data unit:msec) (H1)
+8 Stop Position of Segment-1 (P1)
+12 Feedrate of of Segment-2 (F2)
+16 Dwell Time of Segment-2(data unit:msec) (H2)
+20 Stop Position of Segment-2 (P2)
: :
+4(3n-3) Feedrate of Segment-n (Fn)
+4(3n-2) Dwell Time of Segment-n (data unit:msec) (Hn)
+4(3n-1) Stop Position of Segment-n (Pn)
Fig.11.6 (c) Format of RAM-axis Motion Pattern
The data size of number of motion patterns is 2byte, and others are 4byte.
- 151 -
The top address of the whole the RAM-axis motion patterns is specified on the parameter No.16768.
Moreover, all the data are specified by binary numbers.
Number of motion patterns
This data specifies the number of the RAM-axis motion patterns set on the PMC non-volatile
memory. When the RAM-axis set as a linear axis, the maximum number is 3. When the RAM-axis
set as a rotation axes, the maximum number is 6.
Bottom dead center
Bottom dead center of the RAM-axis position is set.
Data unit: Minimum Input Increment
RAM-axis start position 1 to 3
Three RAM-axis start positions are set. The unit and range of them are the same as the bottom dead
center. One of the RAM-axis motion patterns is decided by means of the RAM-axis start position
and the motion pattern select signals, RAMS1<Gn240.4> and RAMS2<Gn240.5>.
Number of segment in motion pattern
The number of motion segments, which consist on the RAM-axis motion patterns, is set.
Top address of motion Pattern
The top address of the RAM-axis motion pattern on the memory is set with the relative address from
the top address of the memory.
Group of motion pattern data
The data of the RAM axis motion pattern is set.
The table below indicates specification range of the motion pattern data.
Data axis setting minimum unit Valid data range
Rotation axis 1deg/min 0999000*
Feedrate of Segment-n Linear mm 1mm/min 0999000*
axis inch 0.1inch/min 096000*
Dwell Time of Segment-n msec 099999999
Bottom dead center,
RAM-axis Start Position1-3,
Stop Position of Segment-n Least input increment ** 099999999
(machine coordinate
position)
* When the the increment system is IS-B(refer to standard parameter setting table (C)).
However, A value less than the minimum unit cannot be set.
** The decimal point position is determined standard parameter setting table (A).
Selection of RAM-axis motion pattern

One of the RAM-axis motion patterns is decided by means of the RAM-axis start position and the motion
pattern select signals, RAMS1<Gn240.4> and RAMS2<Gn240.5>.
The relations between the RAM-axis positions, the signals, and the selected motion patters are as follows.
Motion pattern select signal
RAM-axis Press start point
Patern end point RAMS2 RAMS1
Motion Pattern
<Gn240.5> <Gn240.4>
1 Up limit 0 0
2 Top dead center 0 1
3 2nd top dead center 1 0
(3) (2nd top dead center) (1) (1)
4 Up limit -2 0 0
6 2nd Top dead center-2 1 0
(6) (2nd Top dead center-2) (1) (1)
When the RAM-axis set as a rotation axes, the RAM axis motion pattern 4, 5, and 6 are enabled.
- 152 -
Up limit -2 means the symmetry point of the up limit based on the bottom dead center. 2nd Top dead
center-2means the symmetry point of the 2nd Top dead center based on the bottom dead center.
Top dead center

2nd top dead 2nd top dead
center-2 center
Up limit-2 Up limit
Down limit-2 Down limit

Bottom dead center
Fig.11.6 (d) Press start position
When the RAM axis motion pattern 4, 5, and 6 are enabled (i.e. the number of motion patterns is 6.), the
RAM-axis motion patterns is decided by means of the RAM-axis start position as follows.
- Present position is situated at the start position 1 (up limit) or the start position 3 (2nd top dead
center) when:
The CNC selects the RAM axis motion pattern 4, 5, and 6.
- Present position is situated at the start position 2 (top dead center) when:
- Present position is situated at the up limit-2 or 2nd top dead center-2 when:
By this way, the press operation shuttling back and forth throuth the bottom dead center can be executed.
Transfer of RAM axis motion data

The application software is able to transfer the RAM-axis motion data to the memory freely. However,
because the ram axis motion data is also referred by the CNC, it should be prevented that both the CNC
and the application software access the ram axis motion data at the same time. For this purpose, the two
signals, RAM-axis data write signal WTRAM <Gn248.4> and RAM-axis data read signal RDRAM
<Fn241.7>, are ready as semaphores.
Befor the applocation software transfers the RAM-axis motion data to the memory, RAM-axis data write
signal WTRAM <Gn248.4> should be set to 1. While this signal is set to 1, the CNC cannot read the
RAM-axis motion data in the memory. On the other hand, while the CNC read the RAM-axis motion data
in the memory, the CNC sets RAM-axis data read signal RDRAM <Fn241.7> to 1. While reading the
RAM-axis motion data in the memory, the applocation software should not write RAM-axis motion data
into the memory.
Moreover, The application software must transfer the ram axis motion data to the PMC extended
non-volatile memory under stopping ram axis and executing T or M function.
- 153 -
Timimg diagram under the block executing M function is as follows:
RAM-axis data read signal

RDRAM<Fn241.7>
RAM-axis data write signal

WTRAM<Gn248.4>
Write data
Auxiliary function completion signal

MFIN<Gn005.0>
Auxiliary function strobe signal

MF<Fn007.0>
Fig.11.6 (e) Timing diagram
11.6.2 RAM-axis Up Motion

Overview
Using the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0> allows setting RAM-axis in the RAM up position
specificated.
After confirmed the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0> = 1, the CNC sets RAM-axis in the RAM
up position specificated immediately.
The feedrate used for the RAM-axis up motion is set on the parameter No. 1420.
Specification
The RAM up position is decided by the motion pattern select signals, RAMS1<Gn240.4> and
RAMS2<Gn240.5> similar to the case for the RAM-axis press operation.
Motion pattern select signals

RAM up position
RAMS2< Gn240.5> RAMS1<Gn240.4>
Up limit 0 0
Top dead point 0 1
2nd top dead point 1 0
(2nd top dead point) (1) (1)
Exceptionally, when the CNC confirms the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0> = 1, the CNC
suspends setting RAM-axis in the RAM up position in the folloing cases. The CNC starts setting
RAM-axis in the RAM up position when the cause as follows is removed.
- When the ram axis is already in the punch operation (the signal RDRAM<Fn241.7> is set to 1)
- When the applocation software transfers the RAM-axis motion data to the memory (the signal
WTRAM <Gn248.4> is set to 1).
Until the RAM-axis up motion is completed after the CNC confirmed the RAM-axis up signal
RAMUP<Gn238.0> = 1, even when RAM-axis up motion cannot be started immediately, the CNC
continues setting the RAM-axis up moving signal RAMUPL<Fn242.1> = 1.
During this period, the CNC cannot accept a new up motion command. Further, if RAM-axis up signal
RAMUP<Gn238.0> is set to 1 during RAM-axis up motion, the CNC ignores the state of the signal
RAMUP<Gn238.0>.
- 154 -
11.6.3 RAM-axis High Speed Pulse Distribution

Overview
The trigger condition of the ram axis motion is the same as the conventional punch motion, as follows. It
is possible to overlap the table axes (X and Yaxes) motion, C-axis motion, and the RAM-axis motion
each other.
Overlap table Axes motion with RAM-axis motion

When the remaining motion of the table axes and C-axis becomes less than tha value of parameter No.
16761, the RAM-axis can be start the motion before the end of positioning depending on setting in
parameter No. 16012. Forthemore, Time interval by which setting of PF to 1 precedes completion of
positioning (parameter No. 16012) can be enabled, when bit 6 (NTI) of parameter No. 16786 is set to 1.
Please refer to the section PRESSING FUNCTION for details of Time interval by which setting of
PF<Y004.2> to 1 precedes completion of positioning (parameter No. 16012)
Table axis feedrate
Remaining motion = Parameter No. 16761
RAM-axis feedrate Time

t
Parameter NTI=0
Time
RAM-axis feedrate RAM-axis motion starts t : Parameter No. 16012
Parameter NTI=1
Time
RAM-axis motion starts
Fig.11.6 (f) Overlap Table Axis Motion with RAM-axis Motion
- 155 -
Overlap RAM-axis motion with table axes motion

It is an explanation as follows when the RAM-axis moves in the direction that goes away from the bottom
dead center. When the absolute coordinate of RAM-axis exceeds the boundary value to start next table
axis motion set by parameter No.16762 and the condition of table axis is ready, .the X/Y table motion is
overlapped with the RAM-axis motion.
Table axes feedrate
Time
RAM-axis feedrate Table axes motion start
Time
Parameter No. 16762absolute coordinate
Fig.11.6 (g) Overlap RAM-axis Motion with Table Axis Motion
Boundary value to start pulse distribution of next blockParameter No.16762

The boundary value of the absolute coordinate of RAM-axis to start next block is set to parameter
No.16762. When the RAM-axis set as a rotation axes, the symmetry coordinate of the coordinate set to
No.16762 based on the bottom dead center is the boundary value too as follows.
For example, when the absolute coordinate of the bottom dead center is 180 degrees and prameter No.
16762 is set to 160 degrees (or 200 degrees), the coordinates of two points (160 degrees and 200 degrees)
are set as the boundary value.
boundary point-2 boundary point-1

(Parameter No.16762)
Bottom dead center
Fig.11.6 (h) Boundary Value to Start Pulse Distribution of Next Block
- 156 -
Timer of press function that can be used by ram axis control

When the CNC can control RAM-axis, the following timer can be used:
Parameter Description Note

- Time interval by which starting RAM- axis movement
precedes completion of positioning This timer is invalid when bit 6 of
No.16012
- Time interval by which starting RAM- axis movement prameter No.16786 is set to 1.
follows completion of positioning
- Time interval by which starting RAM- axis movement
precedes completion of positioning with forming mode This timer is invalid when bit 6 of
No.16032
- Time interval by which starting RAM- axis movement prameter No.16786 is set to 1.
follows completion of positioning with forming mode
- Time interval by which starting the next block movement
No.16033 precedes RAM-axis accession to the voundary value is set -
to parameter No.16762 with forming mode
- Minimum time interval by which start of the next RAM-axis
No.16036 -
motion possible follows the end of RAM-axis motion
- Time interval by which the start of the next block follows
No.16040 RAM- axis accession to the voundary value is set to -
parameter No.16762 with 1cycle RAM-axis motion
Signal
Press stop signal *PE<X004.7>
[Function] Stops press start.
[Operation] When RAM-axis moving, the CNC clears the remaining motion and decelerates and stops
the RAM-axis after the press stop signal *PE<X004.7> is turned to 0.
When the RAM-axis is temporarily stopped, the CNC clears the remaining motion after
the press stop signal *PE<X004.7> is turned to 1.
NOTE
When the CNC stops the RAM-axis in RAM-axis moving by the
press stop signal *PE<X004.7> is turned to 0, the RAM-axis is
positioned in the top dead point (TDC) by using PMC axis control
befor the RAM-axis motion is started again.
Manual press start signal MPS<Gn230.3>

[Function] Executes 1cycle press motion by manual operation.
[Operation] The CNC executes 1cycle press motion with the specified the RAM-axis motion pattern,
after manual press start signal is turned to 1.
Continuous manual press signal MNS<Gn230.4>

[Function] Decides the control method for RAM-axis motion during manual operation.
[Operation] When the continuous manual press signal MNS<Gn230.4> is set to 0, the CNC works
1cycle press motion whenever detects the continuous manual press signal
MNS<Gn230.4> is turned to 1.
When the continuous manual press signal MNS<Gn230.4> is set to 1, the CNC
continuously works the press motion before detects the continuous manual press signal
MNS<Gn230.4> is turned to 0.
- 157 -
Press start lock signal PFL<Gn230.0>

[Function] Locks in the block for 1cycle press.
[Operation] When the press lock signal PFL<Gn230.0> is set to 0, the CNC controls the RAM-axis
motion.
When the press lock signal PFL<Gn230.0> is set to 1, the CNC cannot controls the
RAM-axis motion.
Press start waiting signal PFW<Gn230.1>

[Function] Locks the press start in the block where punching.
[Operation] In the block where punching, the CNC Locks the press start after the press start waiting
signal PFW<Gn230.1> is set to 1.
Can use the press start waiting signal PFW<Gn230.1> to be apply interlock to the press
start by the condition on the machine side etc. However, the press start waiting signal
PFW<Gn230.1> is disabled when RAM-axis moving.
Axis movement Positioning
Press Start WaitingSignal

PFW<Gn230.1>
RAM-axis movement
Fig.11.6 (i) Press start waiting signal
NOTE
This signal is ineffective for manual press operation.
Press start waiting signal B PFWB<X004.4>

[Function] In the block where punching, this signal keeps the press start signal PF<Y004.2> 0.
[Operation] In the block where punching, the CNC Locks the RAM-axis motion start when the press
start waiting signal B PFWB<X004.4> is set to 1.
The press start waiting signal B PFWB<X004.4> works equal with the press start waiting
signal PFW<Gn230.1> except the PFWB signal is set directly from machine side.
However, the press start waiting signal PFW<Gn230.1> is disabled when RAM-axis
moving.
- 158 -
Axis movement Positioning
press start waiting signal B

PFWB<X004.4>
RAM-axis movement
Fig.11.6 (j) press start waiting signal B
NOTE
This signal is ineffective for manual press operation.
Press stop signal neglect EPE<Gn230.5>

[Function] Enables switching of the press stop signal *PE<X004.7> between effective and
ineffective states.
[Operation] When the setting in parameter DPE (No. 16003#6) is 1, the EPE signal enables switching
of the press stop signal *PE<X004.7> between effective and ineffective states. When the
EPE signal is 0, the *PE signal is ignored. When the EPE signal is 1, the *PE signal
is made effective.
NOTE
The press stop signal neglect EPE<Gn230.5> is ineffective for
manual press operation.
Press start auxiliary signal B DSPF<Fn230.5>

[Function] Notifies the PMC of a punching block.
[Output cond.] In a punching block, the press start auxiliary signal B DSPF<Fn230.5> is set to 1 after
the completion of positioning.
This signal is also output when press start wait signals PFW and PFWB are set to 1.
NOTE
The press start auxiliary signal B DSPF<Fn230.5> is ineffective for
manual press operation.
Press start assistance signal DPF<Fn230.6>

[Function] When the press start lock signal PFL <Gn230.0> is 1, the Press start assistance signal
DPF <Fn230.6> is set to 1, not the CNC moves the RAM-axis.
[Output cond.] When the press start lock signal PFL <Gn230.0> is 1, the press start assistance signal
DPF <Fn230.6> is set to 1 after the completion of positioning.
RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0>

[Function] Sets RAM-axis in the RAM up position (i.e. Up limit, Top dead point, 2nd top dead
point) without press operation.
[Operation] When the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0> is set to 1, the CNC sets RAM-axis
in the RAM up position.
- 159 -
The RAM up position is decided by the motion pattern select signals, RAMS1
<Gn240.4> and RAMS2<Gn240.5> as follows:
Motion pattern select signals

RAM up position
RAMS2<Gn240.5> RAMS1<Gn240.4>
Up limit 0 0
Top dead point 0 1
2nd top dead point 1 0
(2nd top dead point) (1) (1)
RAM-axis position check signal RPNCK<Gn238.1>

[Function] Decide whther the CNC checks the RAM-axis is located on the press start point or not.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC checks the RAM-axis is located on the press start
point or not.
When this signal is set to 0, the CNC doesnt check the RAM-axis is located on the
press start point or not.
Motion pattern select signals RAMS1<Gn240.4>, RAMS2<Gn240.5>

[Function] Decides a RAM-axis motion pattern.
[Operation] One of the RAM-axis motion patterns is decided by means of the RAM-axis start position
and the motion pattern select signals, RAMS1<Gn240.4> and RAMS2 <Gn240.5> as
follows:
Motion pattern select signal
RAM-axis Motion Press start point
Patern end point RAMS2 RAMS1
Pattern
<Gn240.5> <Gn240.4>
1 Up limit 0 0
3 2nd top dead center 1 0
(3) (2nd top dead center) (1) (1)
4 Up limit -2 0 0
6 2nd Top dead center-2 1 0
(6) (2nd Top dead center-2) (1) (1)
RAM-axis data write signal WTRAM<Gn248.4>

[Function] Notifies the CNC of whether the aprication software writes the RAM-axis motion data.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC cannot refer to the RAM-axis motion data.
RAM-axis data ready signal STRAM<Fn239.0>

[Function] Notifies the PMC of wheter the condition of using theRAM-axis is satisfactory.
[Output cond.] At power on, this signal is set to 1 when the condition of using theRAM-axis is
satisfactory.
RAM-axis data read signal RDRAM<Fn241.7>

[Function] Notifies the PMCof whether the CNC refers to the RAM-axis motion data.
[Output cond.] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC refers to the RAM-axis motion data.
- 160 -
RAM-axis up moving signal RAMUPL<Fn242.1>

[Function] Informs the PMC that the RAM-axis is controlled moving to the RAM up position by the
RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0>. When the RAM-axis up moving siganal
RAMUPL<Fn242.1> is set to 1, the CNC cannot detect the RAM-axis up signal
RAMUP<Gn238.0> again.
[Output cond.] During the RAM-axis up motion by the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0> = 1,
this siganal is set to 1. This signal is set to 0 after the RAM-axis up motion is
completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 *PE PFWB
Gn230 EPE MNS MPS PFL
Gn238 RPNCK RAMUP
Gn240 RAMS2 RAMS1
Gn248 WTRAM
Fn230 DPF DSPF
Fn239 STRAM
Fn241 RDRAM
Fn242 RAMUPL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16001 CPF MPF MNP

#0 MNP If there remains a distance to be traveled when automatic operation is halted, manual
pressing or continuous manual pressing is:
0: Validated.
1: Invalidated.
#6 MPF In a block containing an M code, the PF signal to start pressing is:

0: Not set to 1.
1: Set to 1.
PF is set to 1 when movement along an axis terminates or when
completion of the miscellaneous function is returned.
#7 CPF At the end of the 01 group containing the G01, G02, or G03 code, the PF signal to start
pressing is:
0: Not set to 1.
1: Set to 1.
- 161 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16002 EUP PWB PEM AET

#0 AET The timer for issuing the EF signal to start external operation in advance (parameter No.
16041) is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#2 PEM MDI operation:

0: Does not start pressing.
1: Starts pressing.
#5 PWB The PFWB signal to wait for the start of pressing B is:
0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
#7 EUP By executing the external operation function, the number of punching cycles is:
0: Not aggregated.
1: Aggregated.
One is added when the PF signal to start pressing and the EF signal to external
operation are set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16003 DPE TCF NPF

#2 NPF The G01, G02, or G03 code specified in normal direction control:
0: Sets PF to 1.
1: Does not set PF to 1.
Bit 2 (NPF) of parameter No. 16003 is validated when bit 7 (CPF) of parameter No.
16001 is set to 1.
#5 TCF After the OP signal indicating that automatic operation is in progress is set from 0 to
1, the PF signal to start pressing is set to 1:
0: Only when a T command is found.
This status is the same as the status in which the PFW signal to wait for the start of
pressing is set to 1.
1: Even if no T commands are found.
#6 DPE The relationship between the *PE signal to stop pressing and the EPE signal for ignoring
the signal to stop pressing is as follows:
0: *PE is always validated irrespective of the status of EPE.
1: *PE is validated when EPE is set to 1, and invalidated when EPE is set to 0.
16008 M code for setting the forming mode
16009 M code for canceling the forming mode

- 162 -
Parameter No. 16008 sets the M code for setting the forming mode.
Parameter No. 16009 sets the M code for canceling the forming mode.
16011 Duration for which the start of positioning is delayed

[Unit of data] msec
For each axis, parameter No. 16011 sets the duration for which the start of positioning is
delayed.
NOTE
1 Only a multiple of 8 can be set for parameter No. 16011.
2 The parameter can only be set for the X, Y, and C axes.
Positioning Positioning in
the next block
16012 Time interval by which setting of PF to 1 precedes completion of positioning

[Data type:] Byte axis
[Unit of data] msec
For each axis, parameter No. 16012 sets the time interval by which setting of the PF
signal to start pressing to 1 precedes completion of positioning.(Function to advance
setting of the PF signal)
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (NTI) of parameter No.16786 is set to 0.
NOTE
1 If a negative value is specified, the PF signal is set to 1 when the
corresponding time period elapses after the completion of the
positioning.
2 When bit 0 (OAD) of parameter No.6131 is set to 1, the data is
invalidated. If it is invalidated, see the descriptions of parameters No.
16013 to No. 16026.
3 The parameter can only be set for the X, Y, and C axes.
16031 Time interval between completion of positioning and the start of the next block when PFL is set to 1

[Unit of data] msec
Parameter No. 16031 sets the time interval between completion of positioning and the
start of the next block when are PFL signal to lock the start of pressing is set to 1.
- 163 -
16032 Time interval by which setting of PF to 1 follows positioning in the forming mode

[Unit of data] msec
Parameter No. 16032 sets the time interval by which setting the PF signal to start pressing
to 1 follows positioning in the forming mode (except for nibbling).
16033 Time interval by which the start of the next bolck follows setting of *PFIN to 0 in the forming mode

[Unit of data] msec
Parameter No. 16033 sets the time interval by which the start of the next block follows
setting the contact of the *PFIN signal to complete punching for singlecycle pressing to
0 in the forming mode.
Positionin Next block
Time set in
parameter
No. 16032
PF
Time set in
parameter
No. 16033
*PFIN
16040 Time interval by which the start of the next block follows setting *PFIN to 0

[Unit of data] msec
Parameter No. 16040 sets the time interval by which the start of the next block follows
setting the contact of the *PFIN signal to complete singlecycle pressing to 0 in a block
where the PF signal to start pressing is set to 1 (except for the nibbling or forming
mode).
16041 Time interval by which setting of EF to 1 precedes the completion of positioning

[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] -120 to 120s
This parameter sets the time interval by which setting of the EF signal to 1 by the
external operation function precedes the completion of positioning. If a negative value is
specified, the EF signal is set to 1 when the corresponding time period elapses after the
completion of positioning.
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (NTI) of parameter No. 16786 is set to 0.
- 164 -
16044 Punching count of every one program execution

[Unit of data] count
This parameter sets the amount of punching count of every program execution
In other words, this parameter sets the amount of punching count between cycle start
performed and cycle start performed again
When the CNC power-on and cycle start performed, this parameter sets 0
This parameter counts up to 99999999, and counts from 0 again afterwards.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16760 RAX

NOTE
#0 RAX RAM-axis control is:

0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
16761 Advancce distance of starting RAM-axis motion before finishing the table positioning ends

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
When the remaining motion of X/Y table becomes less than the value of this parameter,
the ram axis motion is started.
16762 RAM-axis Absolute coordinate of starting the next table positioning before finishing RAM-axis motion

In this case is the RAM-axis moves in the direction that goes away from the bottom dead
center. When the absolute coordinate of RAM-axis exceeds the boundary value set by this
parameter, the X/Y table motion is started.
- 165 -
16767 RAM-axis number

[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
NOTE
Set the axis number of RAM-axis. When this parameter is set to 0, the RAM-axis is
ineffective.
16768 Head address of whole RAM-axis motion pattern

The address is set by the relative address from the head of the PMC extended non-volatile
memory with the decimal number.
The memory used is decided by bit 0 (CSR) of parameter No. 16789.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16786 NTI

#6 NTI RAM-axis motion is started:

0 : When the time interval by which compliation of the X/Y table motion becomes less
than the value of parameter No.16012 and the remaining motion of X/Y table
becomes less than the value of parameter No. 16761.
1 : When the remaining motion of X/Y table becomes less than the value of parameter
No. 16761.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16789 CSR

NOTE
#0 CSR Head address of whole RAM-axis motion pattern set by parameter No.16768 is:
0 : The address for the PMC expanded non-volatile memory
1 : The address for the C language executor variable area
16857 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for first stage
16858 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for second stage
- 166 -
16859 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for third stage
16860 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for fourth stage
16861 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for fifth stage
16862 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for sixth stage
16863 Time during which PF is set to 1 prior to end of positioning for seventh stage

[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] msec
Set the time during which the press start signal PF is set to 1 prior to the end of the
positioning corresponding to each stage in positioning by optimum acceleration (PF early
output function).
These parameters are valid when bit 0 (NTI) of parameter No.16786 is set to 0.
NOTE
These parameters are valid when bit 0 (OADx) of parameter No.
6131 is set to 1.
11.6.4 Alarm and Message

DS4610 RAM AXIS POSITION IS WRONG Ram-axis is not located on the press start position.
- 167 -
12.PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION B-64623EN/01
12 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION

Overview
When machine processing is interrupted (by a reset operation or a power failure, for example), this
function restarts cutting from the interruption point.
This function is optional.
This function consists of the following two processes:

(1) Restart point return process
The tool is positioned to the restart position at the rapid traverse rate.
(2) Restart point search process
A restart program is searched for, then the program is searched for the restart point by using stored
data. During the search operation, the tool does not move, but M/S/T/B codes, the press start signal
PF, and the external operation signal EF are output in the same manner as in normal program
execution.
Moreover, this function prepares the following restarting methods:

<1> Restart from the interruption block
Move to the head position or the interruption position of interruption block, then restart machin
processing from there.
<2> Restart from the first block command the processing mode
Move to the position in which commanded the processing mode that is enabled at the interruption
point, then restart machine processing from there.
Tool
Positioning at selected
restart position
Program start position

Arbitrary position
Restart point
First M code for the processing mode
N1
N2
N5
N3 N4
Manual intervention
Restart point
Restart point (interruption point)
Head position of the
interruption block
- 168 -
B-64623EN/01 12.PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION
- Operation
(1) During normal cutting program execution, the CNC stores current execution data (such as the pointer
to the executed block and coordinate data) in nonvolatile memory.
(2) Program execution is interrupted by a reset switch and so on. Alternatively, the power to the CNC is
turned off.
(3) After the power to the CNC is turned on again, reference position return is performed for all axes.
(This operation is unnecessary if the system is equipped with absolute-position detectors.)
(4) Restart point is selected by the restart position select signal RSRSEL<Gn248.7>.
(5) When the MEM mode is set, then the restart switch is pressed, the PMC sets the program auto restart
signal (RSTRT<Gn201.7>) to 1.
(6) When the status of the RSTRT signal is changed from 1 to 0, the CNC sets the program auto
restart in-progress signal (RSTRTL<Fn199.6>) to 1.
(7) The CNC positions the tool to the restart point (restart point return process).
(8) After searching for the restart program, the CNC searches the program up to the restart point by
using stored data (restart search process). If the CNC restart from the first block in which
commanded the processing mode (restart position select signal RSRSEL<Gn248.7>= 1), the CNC
set the process finished signal RSRCUT<Fn233.7> to 1 during the search.
(9) When the search process is completed, the CNC enters the feed hold state. The CNC then sets the
RSTRTL signal to 0 and the program auto restart completion signal (RSTRTE<Fn199.7>) to 1.
If the CNC restart from the first block in which commanded the processing mode (restart position
select signal RSRSEL<Gn248.7>= 1), the CNC set the process finished signal RSRCUT
<Fn233.7> to 0.
(10) Press the cycle start switch.
(11) The CNC sets the RSTRTE signal <Fn199.7> to 0 to restart program execution from the restart
position. (This means that when a move command is specified during program execution, the tool
moves.)
- 169 -
Restart position
select signal
RSRSEL<Gn248.7>
Program auto restart

signal
RSTRT<Gn201.7>

in-progress signal
RSTRTL<Fn199.6>
Automatic operation
signal
OP<Fn000.7>
Automatic operation
in-progress signal
STL<Fn000.5>
Feed hold lamp signal

SPL<Fn000.4>

completion signal
RSTRTE<Fn199.7>
Cycle start signal

ST<Gn007.2>
Move- Move-
ment ment
Axes movement Stop to the Stop according
restart to the
point program
Return
Serching for
to the Feed Program
CNC status Reset the restart
restart hold stop restart
point
point
Fig.12 (a) Time diagram and CNC status of restart from the interruption block
- 170 -
Restart position
select signal
RSRSEL<Gn248.7>

signal
RSTRT<Gn201.7>

in-progress signal
RSTRTL<Fn199.6>
Automatic operation
signal
OP<Fn000.7>
Automatic operation
in-progress signal
STL<Fn000.5>
Feed hold lamp signal

SPL<Fn000.4>

completion signal
RSTRTE<Fn199.7>
First M code for

the machinig mode
Auxiliary function
strobe signal
MF<Fn007.0>
Completion signal
FIN<Gn004.3>
Process finished signal

RSRCUT<Fn233.7>
Cycle start signal

ST<Gn007.2>
Move- Move- Move-
ment ment ment
Axes movement Stop to the Stop accordin Stop according
restart g to the to the
point program program
Return
to the Serching for the Feed hold Program
CNC Status Reset
restart restart point stop restart
point
Fig.12 (b) Time diagram and CNC status of restart from the first block command the processing mode
- 171 -
- System variables
The search processing for program auto restart can be accelerated by the system variable (#6060) for
reading the execution state of the restart function and the system variable (#6061) for stopping the
counting of the number of execution blocks.
- Variable detail
system variable # 6060 and # 6061 for the program auto restart function are the system variables for the
custom macro.
Please add 100000 to the variable number, and refer by # 106060 and # 106061 when using it by the
execution macro.
Operating state of restart function #6060 Read only

Value of #6060 State
0 The nomal operate
1 The program auto restart
The block that need not be searched at the restart operate , the subprogram, and the execution macro can
skip because it can judge the starting state of each restart function by adding it while programming the
macro control specification that uses #6060. As a result, it is possible to search for the program auto
restart at high speed.
NOTE
Please specify M code of the buffer ring stop immediately before #6060 is used.
Execution block number count control #6061 (Read / Write)

Value of #6061 State
0 The number of execution blocks is counted.
Other than 0 The count of the number of execution blocks is stopped.
When the values other than 0 are set to #6061, CNC stops the count of the number of execution blocks for
the program auto restart function. The range is 0 to 99999999.
In the program auto restart, when the number of execution blocks counted at nomal operate is
corresponding to the number of blocks which the search is executed at restart, and, the coordinate value in
the block is corresponding, it is judged the block that interrupted. Therefore, because it differs from the
number of execution blocks at nomal operate when the block searching by using # 6060 is skipped, it is
not possible to find the breakpoint (restart point), alarm PS2090 occurs.
Specified the stop of the count of the number of execution blocks at nomal operate by using #6061, The
block not counted by the skip at search, and the number of execution blocks can be made the same. Please
also use #6061 when you use #6060.
- Sample program
[Example 1] When you skip the specification that should not be executed at restart.
It judges whether restarting by #6060 when there is an specification that should not be executed at
restart, it diverges to N999 if it is restarting, and unnecessary processing is skipped. Please specified
M code of the buffer ring stop immediately before #6060 is used.
Moreover, because the number of execution blocks changes by having diverged, the values other than
0 are set to #6061, and the count of the number of execution blocks is stopped.
- 172 -
O 9100;
#6061=#6061+ 1;
M 146; M c o d e o f th e b u ffe r rin g s to p
IF [# 6 0 6 0 N E 0 ]G O T O 9 9 9 ;
: T h e e x e c u tio n
M _; U n n e c e s s a ry p ro c e s s in g is b lo c k is n o t
M _; s k ip p e d a t re s ta rt. c o u n te d .
: It d o es n 't c o u n t.
N 999;
# 6 0 6 1 = # 6 0 6 1 -1 ;
M 99;
[Example 2] When you stop the count of the number of execution blocks in the subprogram
At the program that changes whenever the judgment of the condition branching executes
it according to the condition of the signal etc., the values other than 0 are set to #6061, and the count
of the number of execution blocks is stopped.
O 1000;
G 9 0 G 0 0 X 1 0 0 .Y 1 0 0 .;
O 9200
M 98P 9200;
:
G 01X _Y _;
#6061=#6061+1;
:
IF [# 1 0 0 0 E Q 1 ]G O T O 1 0 0 T h e e xe c u tio n
:
: b lo c k is n o t
M 30
N 1 0 0 # 6 0 6 1 = # 6 0 6 1 -1 ; c o u n te d .
:
M99;
- Notes relate to #6060 and # 6061

(1) #6060 and #6061 become 0 at reset.
(2) It is not possible to specify like updating coordinates in the block where the count of the number of
execution blocks has been stopped by using #6061. There is such an specification, When the
program auto restart is executed, alarm (PS2090), "The interruption block is not found" occured.
Signal
Program auto restart signal RSTRT <Gn201.7>
[Function] Starts program auto restart processing.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1 then 0, program auto restart processing starts. When it
starts, the CNC sets the RSTRTL<Fn199.6> signal to 1 to perform the restart point
return process and the restart point search process. Upon completion of these processes,
the CNC enters the feed hold state and sets the RSTRTL signal to 0 and the
RSTRTE<Fn199.7> signal to 1. Subsequently, cutting is restarted from the restart point
by cycle start.
Restart position select signal RSRSEL <Gn248.7>

[Function] Selects the position of restart point.
- 173 -
[Operation] While this signal is held 1, restart point is the position in which commanded the
processing mode that is enabled at the interruption point. (Restart from the first block
command the processing mode)
While this signal is held 0, restart point is the head position or the interruption position
of interruption block. (Restart from the interruption block)
Restart data save signal PPRT <Gn490.7>

[Function] Saves positional information of an interrupted program.
[Operation] While this signal is held 1, information stored for restart is not overwritten even when
other programs including the interrupted program are executed. Information about the
position of the interruption point observed immediately before the signal is set to 1 is
maintained.
Before restarting the interrupted program, set the signal to 0, and perform restart
operations.
Program auto restart in-progress signal RSTRTL <Fn199.6>

[Function] Notifies the PMC whether restart processing is being executed or not.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 when the RSTRT<Gn201.7> signal makes a transition from 1
to 0. The signal is set to 0 when restart processing is completed.
Program auto restart completion signal RSTRTE <Fn199.7>

[Function] Notifies the PMC whether restart processing is completed or not.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 when restart processing is completed. The signal is set to 0
when a cycle start is triggered.
Process finished signal RSRCUT <Fn233.7>

[Function] If the CNC restart from the first block in which commanded the processing mode, the axis
move form the restart point of searching the program to the head position of the
interruption block. This section is already processed. To distinguish from unprocessed
section, this signal is set to 1 while moving the axis.
[Output condition] This signal set to 1 when:
- The axis moves processed section during searching the program to the head position
of the interruption block.
This signal set to 0 when:
- The program auto restart function is not used.
- The axis restarts from the interruption block
- The axis return to the restart position during restart from the first block command
the processing mode
- The axis is move to search the restart position during restart from the first block
command the processing mode
- The CNC performs a feed hold stop operation during restart from the first block
command the processing mode.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn201 RSTRT
Gn248 RSRSEL
- 174 -
Gn490 PPRT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn199 RSTRTE RSTRTL
Fn233 RSRCUT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16960 RSP

#0 RSP If the CNC Restart from the interruption block, restart point is:
0: the interruption position.
1: the head position of interruption block (i.e. the position where pre-block is
completed movement).
16961 Minimum value of first M code for the processing mode (mode 1)
16962 Maximum value of first M code for the processing mode (mode 1)
- 175 -

Each set of the parameters specifies the value range of the 1st M code for each processing
mode.
When the M code used in the program satisfies the condition of each mode (i.e. minimum
value M code maximum value), this M code is confirmed the 1st M code of the
corresponding processing mode.
When restart from the first block command the processing mode, the movement restart
from the position in which commanded 1st M code for the processing mode that is
enabled at the interruption point
Moreover, In the following case, Setting of the mode is enabled (i.e. the mode is not
checked).
- When the set minimum/maximum value is set to 0.
- When the set maximum value is less than the set minimum value.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16981 RSS

[Data type] Bit axis
#0 RSS Program auto restart function for the axis is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Alarm and message

PS2090 INTERRUPTED BLOCK NOT FOUND The termination coordinate of the interrupted block that the
searched and the memorized is different.
Possible causes are as follows:
There is interruption in the movement block skipped by
#6060.
The program is changed after it interrupts.
The offset value is changed after it interrupts.
The coordinate system after it interrupts.
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND [External data I/O]
The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No.
search could not be found.
DS2091 CAN NOT RETURN TO BREAKPOINT Because the machine lock was used, it can not return to
breakpoint.
DS4251 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART START When the program auto restart function was used,it was
ERROR (RESET) not a state of reset.
- 176 -

DS4252 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART START When the program auto restart function was used, the
ERROR(DATA) processing breakpoint was not recorded. The following are
thought as a cause.
When the restart data preservation function is
invalid ,the program is never executed.
After SRAM is changed because of CNC soft a
change,the program is never executed.
DS4253 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART When the interruption block is the following conditions, the
INVALID(MODE) program auto restart function cannot be used.
Nano smoothing mode.
NURBS interpolating.
Smooth interpolating.
DS5258 FEED HOLD IN RESTART Restart processing is interrupted by feed hold operation.
To perform restart processing correctly, press the reset
switch (to release the alarm), and then press the restart
switch again.
DS5259 INTERRUPTED POSITION NOT The interruption point (restart point) is missing. Possible
FOUND causes are as follows:
1. The program to be restarted is modified before restart
processing is performed.
2. The program flow at the program execution time and
the program flow at the restart time differ.
(Example)
The condition for the IF statement of a macro at
the execution time differs from that at the restart
time.
NOTE
(1) During the restart search process, coordinates (machine coordinates, relative coordinates, and
absolute coordinates) and coordinate systems (external workpiece origin offset, G92, G52, G54 to
G59) are changed to stored data. Therefore, care should be taken when a cycle start is performed
without re-executing restart processing after restart processing is interrupted (by a reset, feed hold,
and so on). In such a case, restart processing must be performed again by pressing the restart switch
in the reset state.
(2) If RAM-axis control is enabled, the RAM-axis is not program auto restart.
Before program auto restart, please operate it as follows.
- The ram axis is move to the top dead center.
- Press start lock signal PFL<Gn230.0> is changed to 1. (After program auto restart is finished,
press start lock signal PFL<Gn230.0> is changed to 0.)
- 177 -
APPENDIX
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64623EN/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES
Interface addresses among CNC and PMC are as follows:
[Example of controlling one path using one PMC]
G0000~ X000~
CNC PMC Machine tool

F0000~ Y000~
- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
NOTE
1 In X addresses in the table, the emergency stop signal for each signal is
*ESP<X0008.4>, *ESP<X0008.0>, and *ESP<X008.1>, respectively.
2 One of the following superscripts is attached to the top right of a symbol
depending on the signal type.
- Path type : #P
- Controlled axis type : #SV
In G and F addresses in the table, #P or #SV attached to a signal indicates the
signal is provided for each path on CNC side or each control axis on CNC side,
respectively.
- PMC axis control group type: #PX
#PX attached to a signal indicates the signal is provided for each PMC axis
control group.
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a
different meaning.
4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used
in each path on the CNC side, as shown below.
1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999)
- 181 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64623EN/01
(1) Standard signals

Refer to the FANUC Series 0iF Connection Manual (B-64603EN-1).
(2) Signals dedicated to FANUC Series 0iPF
See the addresses below.
MT CNC
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0000
X0001
X0002
X0003
X0004 *PE *NFIN *PFIN PFWB SAFZ SKIP
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *SPR *ESP (*ESP) (*ESP)
X0009
X0010
X0011
X0012
X0013
- 182 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
NOTE
1 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the *PE, *NFIN, *PFIN, PFWB,
SAFZ, SKIP signals are placed in X004 shown above.
2 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the *PE, *NFIN, *PFIN, PFWB,
SAFZ, SKIP signals are placed in the X addresses set by parameter No. 16045.
(The bit positions do not change.)
3 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to
SKIP8 and the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP are disabled. It amounts to
this, the multi-step skip function and the skip of PMC axis control cannot be used.
4 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to
SKIP8 and the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP are enabled. In this case, each
signal should by all means be placed in the corresponding X address by setting
parameters No.3012, No.3019, No.16045.
- 183 -
CNC MT
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y0000
Y0001
Y0002
Y0003
Y0004 PFB PF NBL
Y0005
Y0006
Y0007
Y0008
Y0009
Y0010
Y0011
Y0012
Y0013
NOTE
1 When bit 3 (YSG) of parameter No. 16000 is 0, the PFB, PF, NBL signals are
placed in Y004 shown above.
2 When bit 3 (YSG) of parameter No. 16000 is 1, the PFB, PF, NBL signals are
placed in the Y addresses set by parameter No. 16046. (The bit positions do not
change.)
- 184 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
PMC CNC
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn201 RSTRT
Gn230 EFS SNP EPE MNS MPS CPS PFW PFL
Gn231 SNP2 MLP2 MLP1
Gn232 WHALC ACZEXE SAFRQ WDC SZTS3 SZTS2 SZTS1 SZTS0
Gn233 CFDC TCNG TNG *JVT2 *JVT1
Gn238 RPNCK RAMUP
Gn239
Gn240 RAMS2 RAMS1 MNTCHG TAXSJ FORMS
Gn241 TMOV6 TMOV5 TMOV4 TMOV3 TMOV2 TMOV1 TMOV0
Gn242
Gn243
Gn244
Gn245
Gn246
Gn247
Gn248 RSRSEL WTRAM
Gn490 PPRT
- 185 -
CNC PMC
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn199 RSTRTE RSTRTL
Fn228 SZN8 SZN7 SZN6 SZN5 SZN4 SZN3 SZN2 SZN1
Fn229
Fn230 NBLE DPF DSPF SPRL
Fn231 WDDO SAFEXE WHAL
Fn232 MIE TIE CMOK CPEN PTLCH
MNTMO
Fn233 RSRCUT
D
STAXS SC2 SC1
Fn239 LASMOD STRAM
Fn240 SZT8 SZT7 SZT6 SZT5 SZT4 SZT3 SZT2 SZT1
Fn241 RDRAM SZT12 SZT11 SZT10 SZT9
Fn242 RAMUPL NRTCD
Fn243
- 186 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions)

Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
item
Nibbling parameter switching Nibbling threelevel switching
SNP2 G231.2 11.5
control using external signals signal
External operation function
External operation function EFS G230.7 3.7
select signal
Tool life management Tool expired signal PTLCH F232.0 2.10.1
Caxis unconnected signal CFDC G233.7 6.3.2
Caxis offset
Coupling enable signal CPEN F232.4 6.3.2
Caxis synchronization control Caxis control status signal SC1, SC2 F233.0, F233.1 6.2
Feed hold signal B Feed hold signal B *SPR X008.5 11.1
Feed hold lamp signal B Feed hold lamp signal B SPRL F230.4 11.1
Manual tool change signal MNTCHG Gn240.3 5.7
Manual tool change inprogress
Manual tool change MNTMOD F233.3 5.7
signal
Taxis selection signal TAXSJ G240.1 5.7
Skip function Skip signal SKIP X004.0 2.12.1
Punch enable signal WDC G232.4 8.6
Punch forbidden area entered
WDDO F231.7 8.6
signal
Safety zone setting ready signal SAFEXE F231.6 8.6
SAFRQ G232.5 8.6
detector signal
SAFZ X004.1 8.6
Safety zone check detector signal
Safety zone interference area
SZN1 - SZN8 F228.0 - F228.7 9.3
signals
F240.0 - F240.7,
In safety zone signal SZT1 - SZT12 8.6
F241.0 - F241.3
In safety zone signal SZT13 - SZT16 F238.4 - F238.7 9.3
Selection signal for tool area of
SZTS0 - SZTS3 G232.0 - G232.3 8.6
safety zone
Multipiece machining setting
Multipiece machining function MLP1, MLP2 G231.0, G231.1 4.2.4
signal
Number of punches signal PN00 - PN31 F234.0 - F237.7 5.3.5
Taxis machine zero point
RP1T - RP16T F244.0 - F245.7 5.3.6
position signals
Turret axis control (T axis Tool change signal TCNG G233.6 5.3.2
control) T code display signal TI00 - TI31 G234.0 - G237.7 5.3.4
Turret indexing completion
TIE F232.6 5.3.3
signal
T command neglect signal TNG G233.5 5.3.1
Unregistered T code signal Unregistered T code signal NRTCD Fn242.0 5.6
Taxis, Caxis jog override
Taxis, Caxis jog override *JVT1, *JVT2 G233.0, G233.1 2.2.1
signal
Rapid traverse time constant Rapid traverse time constant
TMOV0 - TMOV6 G241.0 - G241.6 11.3
override override signals
- 187 -
Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
item
Nibbling finish signal *NFIN X004.6 3.5.2
Press stop signal *PE X004.7 3.5.1
Punch finish signal for 1cycle
*PFIN X004.5 3.5.1
press
1cycle press select signal CPS G230.2 3.5.2
Press start assistance signal DPF F230.6 3.5.5
Press start auxiliary signal B DSPF F230.5 3.5.10
Press stop signal neglect EPE G230.5 3.5.8
Forming mode selection signal FORMS G240.0 3.5.11
Continuous manual press signal MNS G230.4 3.5.3
Press function
Manual press start signal MPS G230.3 3.5.3
Nibbling signal NBL Y004.1 3.5.2
Nibbling completion signal NBLE F230.7 3.5.2
Press start signal PF Y004.2 3.5.1
Press start signal B PFB Y004.3 3.5.7
Press start lock signal PFL G230.0 3.5.4
Press start waiting signal PFW G230.1 3.5.6
Press start waiting signal B PFWB X004.4 3.5.6
Twostep selection for nibbling
SNP G230.6 3.5.9
signal
Program auto restart signal RSTRT G201.7 12
Restart position select signal RSRSEL G248.7 12
Restart data save signal PPRT G490.7 12
Program auto restart function RSTRTL F199.6 12
in-progress signal
Program auto restart completion
RSTRTE F199.7 12
signal
Process finished signal RSRCUT F233.7 12
CMOK F232.5 5.4
Multipletool control signal
Multiple tool indexing signal MIE F232.7 5.4
RAM-axis up signal RAMUP G238.0 11.6.3
RAM-axis up moving signal RAMUPL F242.1 11.6.3
Motion pattern select signal 1 RAMS1 G240.4 11.6.3
Motion pattern select signal 2 RAMS2 G240.5 11.6.3
RAM axis control
RAM-axis data read signal RDRAM F241.7 11.6.3
RAM-axis Position Check Signal RPNCK G238.1 11.6.3
RAM-axis data ready signal STRAM F239.0 11.6.3
RAM-axis data write signal WTRAM G248.4 11.6.3
Switching the punching and
Laser mode set signal LASMOD F239.6 11.2
laser modes
Tool escape completion signal WHALC G232.7 10.4
Workpiece holder interference
Tool escape signal WHAL F231.5 10.4
avoid ance function
Avoid operation signal ACZEXE G232.6 10.4
- 188 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols)

Symbol Signal name Address Reference item
*JVT1, *JVT2 Taxis, Caxis jog override signal G233.0, G233.1 2.2.1
*NFIN Nibbling finish signal X004.6 3.5.2
*PE Press stop signal X004.7 3.5.1
*
Punch finish signal for 1cycle
*PFIN X004.5 3.5.1
press
*SPR Feed hold signal B X008.5 11.1
A ACZEXE Avoid operation signal G232.6 10.4
CFDC Caxis unconnected signal G233.7 6.3.2
CMOK F232.5 5.4
C signal
CPEN Coupling enable signal F232.4 6.3.2
CPS 1cycle press select signal G230.2 3.5.2
DPF Press start assistance signal F230.6 3.5.5
D
DSPF Press start auxiliary signal B F230.5 3.5.10
External operation function select
EFS G230.7 3.7
E signal
EPE Press stop signal neglect G230.5 3.5.8
F FORMS Forming mode selection signal G240.0 3.5.11
L LASMOD Laser mode set signal F239.6 11.2
MIE Multiple tool indexing signal F232.7 5.4
Multipiece machining setting
MLP1, MLP2 G231.0, G231.1 4.2.4
signal
MNS Continuous manual press signal G230.4 3.5.3
M
MNTCHG Manual tool change signal G240.3 5.7
Manual tool change inprogress
MNTMOD F233.3 5.7
signal
MPS Manual press start signal G230.3 3.5.3
NBL Nibbling signal Y004.1 3.5.2
N NBLE Nibbling completion signal F230.7 3.5.2
NRTCD Unregistered T code signal F242.0 5.6
PFL Press start lock signal G230.0 3.5.4
PF Press start signal Y004.2 3.5.1
PFB Press start signal B Y004.3 3.5.7
PFW Press start waiting signal G230.1 3.5.6
P PFWB Press start waiting signal B X004.4 3.5.6
PN00 - PN31 Number of punches signal F234.0 - F237.7 5.3.5
PPRT Restart data save signal G490.7 12
PTLCH Tool expired signal F232.0 2.10.1
RAMS1 Motion pattern select signal 1 G240.4 11.6.3
RAMS2 Motion pattern select signal 2 G240.5 11.6.3
RAMUP RAM-axis up signal G238.0 11.6.3
RAMUPL RAM-axis up moving signal F242.1 11.6.3
RDRAM RAM-axis data read signal F241.7 11.6.3
Taxis machine zero point position
R RP1T - RP16T F244.0 - F245.7 5.3.6
signals
RPNCK RAM-axis position check signal G238.1 11.6.3
RSRCUT Process finished signal F233.7 12
RSRSEL Restart position select signal G248.7 12
RSTRT Program auto restart signal G201.7 12
- 189 -
Symbol Signal name Address Reference item

Program auto restart completion
RSTRTE F199.7 12
signal
R
Program auto restart in-progress
RSTRTL F199.6 12
signal
SAFEXE Safety zone setting ready signal F231.6 8.6
Workpiece holder position detector
SAFZ X004.1 8.6
signal
Workpiece holder position detector
SAFRQ G232.5 8.6
signal
SC1, SC2 Caxis control status signal F233.0,F233.1 6.2
SKIP Skip signal X004.0 2.12.1
Twostep selection for nibbling
SNP G230.6 3.5.9
signal
Nibbling threelevel switching
SNP2 G231.2 11.5
S signal
SPRL Feed hold lamp signal B F230.4 11.1
STAXS Taxis selected signal F233.2 5.7
STRAM RAM-axis data ready signal F239.0 11.6.3
Safety zone interference area
SZN1 - SZN8 F228.0 - F228.7 9.3
signals
F240.0 - F240.7
SZT1 - SZT12 In safety zone signal 8.6
F241.0 - F241.3
SZT13 - SZT16 In safety zone signal F238.4 - F238.7 9.3
Selection signal for tool area of
SZTS0 - SZTS3 G232.0 - G232.3 8.6
safety zone
TAXSJ Taxis selection signal G240.1 5.7
TCNG Tool change signal G233.6 5.3.2
TI00 - TI31 T code display signal G234.0 - G237.7 5.3.4
T TIE Turret indexing completion signal F232.6 5.3.3
Rapid traverse time constant
TMOV0 - TMOV6 G241.0 - G241.6 11.3
override signals
TNG T command neglect signal G233.5 5.3.1
WDC Punch enable signal G232.4 8.6
Punch forbidden area entered
WDDO F231.7 8.6
signal
W
WHAL Tool escape signal F231.5 10.4
WHALC Tool escape completion signal G232.7 10.4
WTRAM RAM-axis data write signal G248.4 11.6.3
- 190 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)

Address Signal name Symbol Reference item
X004.0 Skip signal SKIP 2.12.1
X004.1 Workpiece holder position detector signal SAFZ 8.6
X004.4 Press start waiting signal B PFWB 3.5.6
X004.5 Punch finish signal for 1cycle press *PFIN 3.5.1
X004.6 Nibbling finish signal *NFIN 3.5.2
X004.7 Press stop signal *PE 3.5.1
X008.5 Feed hold signal B *SPR 11.1
Y004.1 Nibbling signal NBL 3.5.2
Y004.2 Press start signal PF 3.5.1
Y004.3 Press start signal B PFB 3.5.7
G201.7 Program auto restart signal RSTRT 12
G230.0 Press start lock signal PFL 3.5.4
G230.1 Press start waiting signal PFW 3.5.6
G230.2 1cycle press select signal CPS 3.5.2
G230.3 Manual press start signal MPS 3.5.3
G230.4 Continuous manual press signal MNS 3.5.3
G230.5 Press stop signal neglect EPE 3.5.8
G230.6 Twostep selection for nibbling signal SNP 3.5.9
G230.7 External operation function select signal EFS 3.7
G231.0, G231.1 Multipiece machining setting signal MLP1, MLP2 4.2.4
G231.2 Nibbling threelevel switching signal SNP2 11.5
G232.0 - G232.3 Selection signal for tool area of safety zone SZTS0 - SZTS3 8.6
G232.4 Punch enable signal WDC 8.6
G232.5 Workpiece holder position detector signal SAFRQ 8.6
G232.6 Tool escape completion signal ACZEXE 10.4
G232.7 Tool escape signal WHALC 10.4
G233.0, G233.1 Taxis, Caxis jog override signal *JVT1, *JVT2 2.2.1
G233.5 T command neglect signal TNG 5.3.1
G233.6 Tool change signal TCNG 5.3.2
G233.7 Caxis unconnected signal CFDC 6.3.2
G234.0 - G237.7 T code display signal TI00 - TI31 5.3.4
G238.0 RAM-axis up signal RAMUP 11.6.3
G238.1 RAM-axis Position Check Signal RPNCK 11.6.3
G240.0 Forming mode selection signal FORMS 3.5.11
G240.1 Taxis selection signal TAXSJ 5.7
G240.3 Manual tool change signal MNTCHG 5.7
G240.4 Motion pattern select signal 1 RAMS1 11.6.3
G240.5 Motion pattern select signal 2 RAMS2 11.6.3
G241.0 - G241.6 Rapid traverse time constant override signals TMOV0 - TMOV6 11.3
G248.4 RAM-axis data write signal WTRAM 11.6.3
G248.7 Restart position select signal RSRSEL 12
G490.7 Restart data save signal PPRT 12
F199.6 Program auto restart in-progress signal RSTRTL 12
F199.7 Program auto restart completion signal RSTRTE 12
F228.0 - F228.7 Safety zone interference area signals SZN1 - SZN8 9.3
F230.4 Feed hold lamp signal B SPRL 11.1
F230.5 Press start auxiliary signal B DSPF 3.5.10
F230.6 Press start assistance signal DPF 3.5.5
F230.7 Nibbling completion signal NBLE 3.5.2
F231.5 Tool escape signal WHAL 10.4
F231.6 Safety zone setting ready signal SAFEXE 8.6
F231.7 Punch forbidden area entered signal WDDO 8.6
- 191 -
Address Signal name Symbol Reference item

F232.0 Tool expired signal PTLCH 2.10.1
F232.4 Coupling enable signal CPEN 6.3.2
F232.5 Multiple tool indexing complete signal CMOK 5.4
F232.6 Turret indexing completion signal TIE 5.3.3
F232.7 Multiple tool indexing signal MIE 5.4
F233.0, F233.1 Caxis control status signal SC1, SC2 6.2
F233.2 Taxis selected signal STAXS 5.7
F233.3 Manual tool change inprogress signal MNTMOD 5.7
F233.7 Process finished signal RSRCUT 12
F234.0 - F237.7 Number of punches signal PN00 - PN31 5.3.5
F238.4 - F238.7 In safety zone signal SZT13 - SZT16 9.3
F239.0 RAM-axis data ready signal STRAM 11.6.3
F239.6 Laser mode set signal LASMOD 11.2
F240.0 - F240.7,
In safety zone signal SZT1 - SZT12 8.6
F241.0 - F241.3
F241.7 RAM-axis data read signal RDRAM 11.6.3
F242.0 Unregistered T code signal NRTCD 5.6
F242.1 RAM-axis up moving signal RAMUPL 11.6.3
F244.0 - F245.7 Taxis machine zero point position signals RP1T - RP16T 5.3.6
- 192 -
B-64623EN/01 INDEX
INDEX
Follow-up.........................................................................8
<Number> Forming Mode Selection Signal.....................................44
1Cycle Press.................................................................28 FUNCTION .................................................................122
2nd Reference Position Return Signals / 3rd, 4th FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS THAT DIFFER
Reference Position Return Signals .............................10 FROM THE M SERIES ...............................................7
FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING .........46
<A>
AI Advanced Preview Control / AI Contour Control I...18 <G>
Alarm and Message........................................................53 G Code System ..............................................................20
ALARM AND MESSAGE ...................................120,127 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............... s-2
Alarm and Message......................................................167 GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION
AUTOMATIC OPERATION ........................................11 DEVELOPMENT ..................................................... s-8
Automatic Reference Position Return and Return from
the Reference Position..................................................9 <I>
AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) ......................46 Improving the Automatic Safetyzone Setting ............123
AUTOMATIC SAFETYZONE SETTING................105 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC................181
AUXILIARY FUNCTION.............................................18 INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE METHODS............130
Auxiliary Function Lock ................................................18 Interference Safety Zone Area Signals <Fn228> .........123
Auxiliary Function/2nd Auxiliary Function...................18 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION ...................................12
AXIS CONTROL.............................................................7
<J>
<B> Jog Feed/Incremental Feed ..............................................8
Base Point Command of Multipiece Machining (G98) 50
Block in which Punching is Made..................................23 <L>
Linear Interpolation .......................................................13
<C> LIST OF ADDRESSES ...............................................181
C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING) ..........85 LIST OF FUNCTIONS....................................................1
CAUTION....................................................................100 LIST OF SIGNALS .....................................................187
CAXIS CONTROL ......................................................85 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)........................191
CAXIS OFFSET FUNCTION .....................................90 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ........................187
Caxis Offset Type A.....................................................90 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ..........................189
Caxis Offset Type B.....................................................92
CAXIS SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL ...............86 <M>
Circular Interpolation .....................................................13 Machine Lock ................................................................12
Continuous Press (Nibbling) ..........................................32 MANUAL OPERATION.................................................8
CONTROL FUNCTION..............................................139 Manual Press..................................................................37
Controlled Axis ................................................................7 MANUAL TOOL CHANGE .........................................83
Cycle Start/Feed Hold ....................................................11 Mirror Image....................................................................8
MultiPiece Machining Commands (G73, G74)............51
<D> MULTIPIECE MACHINING FUNCTION .................50
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND MULTIPLETOOL CONTROL....................................69
NOTE ........................................................................s-1
Detecting Workpiece Holder Position Using an External <N>
Signal........................................................................107 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION.....................................27
Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone ................110 Nibbling Constant Positioning Time Control (Three
Levels)......................................................................144
<E> NIBBLING FUNCTION................................................25
Extending Safety Zone Check Areas............................122 NIBBLING PARAMETER SWITCHING CONTROL
Extending Safety Zone Tool Areas ..............................123 USING EXTERNAL SIGNALS ..............................147
EXTERNAL OPERATION FUNCTION ......................44 Normal Direction Control ..............................................13
NOTE...........................................................................138
<F> Number of Punches Signal.............................................65
FEED HOLD SIGNAL B/FEED HOLD LAMP
SIGNAL B................................................................139 <O>
FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND OVERVIEW ............................................. 98,101,122,129
DECELERATION CONTROL ..................................14
i-1
INDEX B-64623EN/01
<P> Taxis Machine Zero Point Position Signals .................67

PARAMERER .............................................................136 TAXIS/CAXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL........98
Parameter .......................................................................53 Tool Change Signal........................................................62
PARAMETER................................................100,113,124 TOOL DATA SETTING FUNCTION ..........................76
Parameter .....................................................................144 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION).............................56
Position Gain Switching Speed and PI/IP Control TOOL FUNCTIONS......................................................19
Selection ...................................................................144 Tool Life Management...................................................19
Positioning .....................................................................12 TOOL OFFSET..............................................................57
POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF...............................25 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .................................56
Positioning by Optimum Accelerations..........................15 TOOL/WORKPIECE HOLDER AREAS....................135
PREFACE .................................................................... p-1 TURRET AXIS CONTROL (T AXIS CONTROL) ......58
PRESS FUNCTION.......................................................28 Turret Indexing Completion Signal................................63
Press Start Assistance Signal..........................................39 Twostep Selection (Input) SNP for Nibbling ...............43
Press Start Auxiliary Signal B........................................43 Type A .................................................................. 101,130
Press Start Lock Signal (Input) ......................................38 Type B .................................................................. 102,132
Press Start Signal B (Output) .........................................41 TYPES OF SAFTY ZONE CHECK............................101
Press Start Waiting Signal (Input) and Press Start
Waiting Signal B ........................................................40 <U>
Press Stop Signal Neglect ..............................................42 UNREGISTERED T CODE SIGNAL...........................82
PRESSING FUNCTION................................................23
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION...............168 <V>
PROGRAM COMMAND ..............................................20 Velocity Loop Gain Switching According to the
PUNCH FUNCTION (1CYCLE PRESSING) .............23 Positioning Distance.................................................143
<R> <W>
RAM-AXIS CONTROL ..............................................149 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
RAM-axis High Speed Pulse Distribution....................155 HANDLING.............................................................. s-5
RAM-axis Setting.........................................................149 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
RAM-axis Up Motion ..................................................154 PROGRAMMING..................................................... s-3
Rapid Traverse Override ................................................15 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY
Rapid Traverse Rate.......................................................14 MAINTENANCE...................................................... s-9
RAPID TRAVERSE TIME CONSTANT OVERRIDE142 WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR
Reference Item ...............................................................54 TOUCH PANEL ....................................................... s-7
REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..............9 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS............. s-7
Workpiece Holder Detection Command ......................106
<S> WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 AVOIDANCE FUNCTION .....................................129
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION ........................122
SAFETY ZONE CHECK.............................................101 <Y>
SERVO PARAMETER SWITCHING FUNCTION....143 YAXIS CRACK CANCEL ..........................................54
Setting of Machining Method for MultiPiece
Machining...................................................................52
SETTING THE SAFETY ZONE.................................104
SETTING THE TOOL SHAPE AREA........................105
Signal .............................................................................52
SIGNAL .........................................................111,123,135
Single Block...................................................................12
SKIP FUNCTION ..........................................................22
Skip Function .................................................................22
SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................98
Specifying the Rotation Axis ...........................................7
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION .....................................19
SWITCHING THE PUNCHING AND LASER
MODES....................................................................140
<T>
T Code Display Signal ...................................................65
T Command Neglect Signal ...........................................61
i-2
B-64623EN/01 REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
01 Aug., 2014
r-1
B-64623EN/01
* B - 6 4 6 2 3 E N / 0 1 *

Fanuc Oi-Pf Connection Manual B-64623EN - 01

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Fanuc Oi-Pf Connection Manual B-64623EN - 01

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

FANUC Series 0+-PF

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL

On the virtual machine operator panel screen, never support safety-related

GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT

1 Be careful enough if you write an identical NC data, an identical PMC data or a

Therefore, do NOT write above data in the following cases.

3 Be careful enough if you process a PMC signal set that is related to a NC

List Table of Applications and Network Functions

WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

CNC PMC Machine tool

- Standard parameter setting tables

(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)

(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)

(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

- Parameters other than the bit-type parameters above

1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis

Related manuals of Series 0i-PF

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR i series

Table 2 Related manuals

Notes on various kinds of data

2.10 PROGRAM COMMAND .............................................................................. 20

6 CAXIS CONTROL ............................................................................... 85

7 TAXIS/CAXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL .................................... 98

12 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART FUNCTION ......................................... 168

Table1 (a) List of functions

2 FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS THAT DIFFER

This chapter consists of the following sections:

2.1 AXIS CONTROL..................................................................................................................................7

2.1 AXIS CONTROL

2.1.1 Controlled Axis

2.1.2 Specifying the Rotation Axis

2.1.3 Mirror Image

2.2 MANUAL OPERATION

2.2.1 Jog Feed/Incremental Feed

*JVT2 *JVT1 Jog feedrate override

[Input type] Parameter input

#0 NJC The jog federate:

2.3 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT

2.3.1 Automatic Reference Position Return and Return from

Return from reference position (G29) cannot be used.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 SZR Automatic reference position return (G28) commands:

2.3.2 2nd Reference Position Return Signals / 3rd, 4th Reference

[Classification] Output signal

: 1 Return end signal for the first axis

[Output cond.] These signals turn to 1 when:

Fn098 ZP38 ZP37 ZP36 ZP35 ZP34 ZP33 ZP32 ZP31

Fn100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41

[Input type] Parameter input

Position specified in parameter No.1241, 1242, or 1243

Value specified in Value specified in

Negative direction Positive direction

2.4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

JVT2 JVT1 Jog feedrate override